Aloka SSD 4000 User Manual

MN1-1174 Rev.
ULTRASOUND DIAGNOSTIC
EQUIPMENT
SSD-4000
Manual Number : MN1-1174
Rev.9
0123
ALOKA CO., LTD.

MN1-1174 Rev.9
VS-FlexGrid Pro
Copyright(C)1999 Videosoft Corporation
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
MN1-1174 Rev.9
Safety alert symbols
Safety alert symbols

The four indications [Danger], [Warning], [Caution] and [Note] used on this equipment and in this instruction man-
ual have the following meaning.
Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
A warning message is inserted here.
Warning
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
A warning message is inserted here.
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
A caution message is inserted here.
Note
Indicates a strong request concerning an item that must be observed in order to prevent damage or deteriora-
tion of the equipment and also to ensure that it is used efficiently.
An explanatory text is inserted here.
1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
CONTENTS
1. Operation Method
1-1. Operation panel ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-2. Graphic Display ........................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-3. Operating the various switches .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3-1. ACOUST POWER ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3-2. ACQUIRE .................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3-3. ANGLE ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-3-4. BODY MARK ............................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-3-5. CANCEL...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-3-6. CLEAR......................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-3-7. COMMENT ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-3-8. CONTRAST............................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-3-9. CURSOR/B.L.S ......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-3-10. DDD ........................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1-3-11. DEPTH/RANGE ........................................................................................................................ 1-12
1-3-12. DOP FILTER ............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1-3-13. ELEMENT SELECT ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1-3-14. EXT ............................................................................................................................................ 1-13
1-3-15. FOCUS....................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1-3-16. FRAME RATE........................................................................................................................... 1-15
1-3-17. FREEZE ..................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1-3-18. GAIN.......................................................................................................................................... 1-16
1-3-19. HARMONIC ECHO (Option : SOP-4000-12B is necessary.) .................................................. 1-17
1-3-20. ID................................................................................................................................................ 1-17
1-3-21. IMAGE/FREQ ........................................................................................................................... 1-18
1-3-22. INVERT ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1-3-23. IP SELECT (Image Processing Select)...................................................................................... 1-20
1-3-24. MEASUREMENT ..................................................................................................................... 1-20
1-3-25. MENU ........................................................................................................................................ 1-21
1-3-26. MODE ........................................................................................................................................ 1-21
1-3-27. PRESET ..................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1-3-28. PRINT ........................................................................................................................................ 1-24
1-3-29. PROBE....................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1-3-30. REC ............................................................................................................................................ 1-26
1-3-31. REPORT .................................................................................................................................... 1-26
1-3-32. REVIEW .................................................................................................................................... 1-26
1-3-33. SAMPLE VOLUME.................................................................................................................. 1-27
1-3-34. SCAN AREA ............................................................................................................................. 1-27
1-3-35. SELECT ..................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1-3-36. SEARCH .................................................................................................................................... 1-29
2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-37. STC ............................................................................................................................................. 1-29

1-3-38. STORE........................................................................................................................................ 1-30
1-3-39. STEER/ROTAT.......................................................................................................................... 1-30
1-3-40. SWEEP SPEED .......................................................................................................................... 1-31
1-3-41. VCM ( Video Cine Memory ) .................................................................................................... 1-32
1-3-42. VEL RANGE.............................................................................................................................. 1-32
1-3-43. ZOOM......................................................................................................................................... 1-33
1-3-44. Full keyboard .............................................................................................................................. 1-35
1-4. Before Starting an Examination ................................................................................................................. 1-36
1-4-1. Explanation of an ID entry screen .............................................................................................. 1-36
1-4-2. How to register a patient............................................................................................................. 1-42
1-4-3. Search function ........................................................................................................................... 1-43
1-4-4. Find (Option: SOP-4000-20B is necessary.) .............................................................................. 1-44
1-4-5. Data Management....................................................................................................................... 1-46
1-5. Examination in the B Mode........................................................................................................................ 1-49
1-5-1. Basic Operation Procedure ......................................................................................................... 1-49
1-6. B/M and M Modes...................................................................................................................................... 1-51
1-6-1. Basic operation procedure .......................................................................................................... 1-51
1-7. B/D and D Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 1-56
1-8. Flow Display............................................................................................................................................... 1-59
1-9. Power Flow display .................................................................................................................................... 1-61
1-9-1. Basic operation ........................................................................................................................... 1-61
1-10. Tissue Doppler Imaging display (Option : SOP-4000-9B is necessary.) ................................................... 1-61
1-11. Brachytherapy Guide Lines ........................................................................................................................ 1-62
1-12. Contrast Harmonic Echo (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)..................................................................... 1-66
1-13. Real time 3D mode (Option: EU-9112 is required) ................................................................................... 1-68
1-13-1. Real time 3D display screen ....................................................................................................... 1-69
1-13-2. Real time 3D display screen ....................................................................................................... 1-73
1-13-3. Switches to be used and menu .................................................................................................... 1-75
1-13-5. Applied functional operation procedure ..................................................................................... 1-84
1-14. Actions to be taken when a defect is detected ............................................................................................ 1-86
1-14-1. Ensuring patient safety ............................................................................................................... 1-86
1-14-2. Handling the instrument ............................................................................................................. 1-86
3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2. Cine Memory and Store Image

2-1. Cine Memory ............................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1-1. Basic Operation Procedure........................................................................................................... 2-4
2-1-2. Cine scale and search mark .......................................................................................................... 2-5
2-1-3. Loop playback function................................................................................................................ 2-6
2-2. Store/Send .................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-2-1. Basic Operation Procedure......................................................................................................... 2-11
2-3. Review Function ........................................................................................................................................ 2-14
2-3-1. Image Browser ........................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-4. VCM (Video Cine Memory) (Option: when EU-9083 or EU-9111 is connected).................................... 2-27
2-4-1. Acquiring an image to the VCM................................................................................................ 2-28
2-4-2. Image search and loop playback using the VCM....................................................................... 2-32
2-4-3. Storing image data in the VCM ................................................................................................. 2-34
2-4-4. Reading image data in the VCM................................................................................................ 2-38
2-5. Continuous Acquire function (Option: EU-9111 is necessary) ................................................................. 2-41
2-5-1. Switch applied............................................................................................................................ 2-41
2-5-2. Preparing Continuous Acquire................................................................................................... 2-41
2-5-3. Capturing images using Continuous Acquire function .............................................................. 2-42
2-5-4. Browsing images using Continuous Acquire function............................................................... 2-45
2-5-5. Storing image data...................................................................................................................... 2-47
2-5-6. Completion of the Continuous Acquire function ....................................................................... 2-48
2-5-7. Loading data stored on the HDD or external media .................................................................. 2-48
2-6. Stress Echo Examination (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)........................................................................ 2-49
2-6-1. Preparations for a stress echo examination ................................................................................ 2-49
2-6-2. Starting a stress echo examination ............................................................................................. 2-52
2-6-3. Interrupting a stress echo examination....................................................................................... 2-54
2-6-4. Displaying a stress echo image .................................................................................................. 2-54
2-6-5. Canceling a stress echo display.................................................................................................. 2-56
2-7. Stress Echo Examination(Option: EU-9111 is necessary)......................................................................... 2-57
2-7-1. Preparations before Taking in Images........................................................................................ 2-59
2-7-2. Operating Examples for taking in Images.................................................................................. 2-59
2-7-3. Operating examples of Shuffle (Compare display).................................................................... 2-67
2-7-4. Scoring function ......................................................................................................................... 2-72
2-7-5. Scoring Report ........................................................................................................................... 2-74
2-7-6. Operating examples of Store (Stress Echo) ............................................................................... 2-75
2-7-7. Load(Stress Echo) ...................................................................................................................... 2-76
3. Recording Images
3-1. Recording to a printer .................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3-2. Recording and playing back images on a VCR ........................................................................................... 3-1
3-2-1. When operating it by the main part side of VCR......................................................................... 3-1
4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3-2-2. Operations using the panel switches on the SSD-4000 side......................................................... 3-2
3-3. Printing a VCR Image .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
4. Physiological Signals
4-1. Method of Displaying Physiological Signals ............................................................................................... 4-1
4-2. ECG Sync Display........................................................................................................................................ 4-2
5. Menu
5-1. Menu setting operations................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5-2. Setting Procedure.......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-3. B mode menu................................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5-3-1. AGC (B)........................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5-3-2. Angle Gain.................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-3-3. Beam Processing........................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-3-4. Brachytherapy............................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-3-5. Focus (B) ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-3-6. Frame CORRE (B) ....................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-3-7. Frame CORRE LEV. .................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-3-8. Frame CORRE Type..................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-3-9. FTC (B)......................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-3-10. Guide Line Setting........................................................................................................................ 5-8
5-3-11. Harmonic Echo ............................................................................................................................ 5-9
5-3-12. Horizontal SMOOTH (B) ............................................................................................................. 5-9
5-3-13. Image Rotation (B) ....................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-3-14. Line Density (B) ........................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-3-15. Loop Mode (2B) ......................................................................................................................... 5-10
5-3-16. Manual Focus (B) ....................................................................................................................... 5-10
5-3-17. OMNI Plane................................................................................................................................ 5-10
5-3-18. Pixel Smoothing (B) ................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-3-19. Smoothing (B) ............................................................................................................................ 5-11
5-3-20. PRF Limit ................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-3-21. Puncture Guide Line ................................................................................................................... 5-11
5-3-22. Relief (B) .................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5-4. M mode menu............................................................................................................................................. 5-13
5-4-1. AGC (M)..................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5-4-2. Echo Erase .................................................................................................................................. 5-13
5-4-3. Focus (M).................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5-4-4. FTC (M)...................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5-4-5. Manual Focus (M) ...................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-4-6. Relief (M) ................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-4-7. Sweep Speed (M)........................................................................................................................ 5-14
5
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-5. D mode/TDI-D menu ................................................................................................................................. 5-15

5-5-1. Color Map (D)............................................................................................................................ 5-15
5-5-2. Compression Curve (D) ............................................................................................................. 5-15
5-5-3. Filter Control (D) ....................................................................................................................... 5-15
5-5-4. Focus (D).................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5-5-5. Image Polarity (D)...................................................................................................................... 5-16
5-5-6. Image Select (D) ........................................................................................................................ 5-16
5-5-7. Manual Focus (D) ...................................................................................................................... 5-17
5-5-8. Resolution Select (D) ................................................................................................................. 5-17
5-5-9. Smoothing (D)............................................................................................................................ 5-17
5-5-10. Sweep Speed (D)........................................................................................................................ 5-18
5-6. FLOW/Power Flow/TDI Flow/TDI Power Flow menu............................................................................. 5-19
5-6-1. Average (Flow) .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5-6-2. B Refresh.................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5-6-3. Baseline Shift (Flow) ................................................................................................................. 5-19
5-6-4. Capture Mode............................................................................................................................. 5-20
5-6-5. Capture Time.............................................................................................................................. 5-20
5-6-6. Color Map (Flow) ...................................................................................................................... 5-20
5-6-7. Color Polarity ............................................................................................................................. 5-21
5-6-8. DDD ........................................................................................................................................... 5-21
5-6-9. Display Priority (Flow) .............................................................................................................. 5-22
5-6-10. DISP Priority Level (Flow)........................................................................................................ 5-22
5-6-11. Flow Filter (Flow) ...................................................................................................................... 5-22
5-6-12. Focus (Flow) .............................................................................................................................. 5-23
5-6-13. Frame CORRE (Flow) ............................................................................................................... 5-23
5-6-14. Frame Rate (Flow) ..................................................................................................................... 5-23
5-6-15. Frame Rate Accelerator.............................................................................................................. 5-24
5-6-16. Image Select (Flow) ................................................................................................................... 5-24
5-6-17. Manual Focus (Flow) ................................................................................................................. 5-24
5-6-18. Noise REDUC (Flow) ................................................................................................................ 5-25
5-6-19. PIX SMOOTH (Flow)................................................................................................................ 5-25
5-6-20. Rejection (Flow)......................................................................................................................... 5-25
5-6-21. Smoothing (Flow) ...................................................................................................................... 5-25
5-6-22. Wall Motion Reduction.............................................................................................................. 5-26
5-7. Other menu................................................................................................................................................. 5-27
5-7-1. Area Lock................................................................................................................................... 5-27
5-7-2. Beam Steering ............................................................................................................................ 5-27
5-7-3. Body Mark Location .................................................................................................................. 5-27
5-7-4. Body Mark Menu ....................................................................................................................... 5-28
5-7-5. B/SYNC Mode ........................................................................................................................... 5-28
5-7-6. Character Size ............................................................................................................................ 5-28
5-7-7. Coding Editor ............................................................................................................................. 5-28
6
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7-8. Color Map (B,M) ........................................................................................................................ 5-29

5-7-9. ECG Display...............................................................................................................................5-29
5-7-10. ECG SYNC ................................................................................................................................ 5-29
5-7-11. Element Select ............................................................................................................................ 5-29
5-7-12. Graphic Color ............................................................................................................................. 5-30
5-7-13. Graphic Editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-30
5-7-14. Imaging Information................................................................................................................... 5-31
5-7-15. Invert........................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5-7-16. Invert Link .................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5-7-17. Menu Location............................................................................................................................ 5-31
5-7-18. PCG Display ...............................................................................................................................5-32
5-7-19. PCG Filter .................................................................................................................................. 5-32
5-7-20. Post Processing ........................................................................................................................... 5-32
5-7-21. Post Process.LEV ....................................................................................................................... 5-34
5-7-22. Pulse Display .............................................................................................................................. 5-35
5-7-23. R Wave Beep ............................................................................................................................. 5-35
5-7-24. R-Delay Time ............................................................................................................................ 5-35
5-7-25. Send to Storage (S) ..................................................................................................................... 5-35
5-7-26. Send to Storage (M) ................................................................................................................... 5-35
5-7-27. Steering Invert ............................................................................................................................ 5-36
5-7-28. Steering Link .............................................................................................................................. 5-36
5-7-29. Store on MO (S).......................................................................................................................... 5-36
5-7-30. Store on MO (M) ........................................................................................................................ 5-36
5-7-31. Store on MO(JPG) ...................................................................................................................... 5-36
5-7-32. Store on CD-R BUFFER(S) ....................................................................................................... 5-36
5-7-33. Store on CD-R BUFFER(M) ...................................................................................................... 5-37
5-7-34. Store on CD-R BUFFER(J) ........................................................................................................ 5-37
5-7-35. Store on FD (JPG) ...................................................................................................................... 5-37
5-7-36. Store on HDD (S) ....................................................................................................................... 5-37
5-7-37. Store on HDD (M) ...................................................................................................................... 5-37
5-7-38. Thermal Index............................................................................................................................. 5-37
5-7-39. View Gamma .............................................................................................................................. 5-38
5-7-40. Zoom Lock.................................................................................................................................. 5-38
5-7-41. PC Printer.................................................................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-42. DICOM Printer(S) ...................................................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-43. Archive Group1 .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5-7-44. Archive Group2 .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5-7-45. Archive Group3 .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5-7-46. ACQUIRE -> Store (HDD) ........................................................................................................ 5-39
5-7-47. ACQUIRE -> Store (MO) .......................................................................................................... 5-39
5-7-48. ACQUIRE -> SEND .................................................................................................................. 5-39
7
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8. VCM Menu (The optional EU-9083 or EU-9111 is necessary.) ............................................................... 5-40
5-8-1. Option: EU-9083 or EU-9111.................................................................................................... 5-40
5-8-1-1. ActiveWindow Shift ................................................................................................ 5-40
5-8-1-2. Color Mode (VCM) ................................................................................................. 5-40
5-8-1-3. ECG Cycle(VCM) ................................................................................................... 5-40
5-8-1-4. Format (VCM) ......................................................................................................... 5-41
5-8-1-5. Frame Rate (VCM) .................................................................................................. 5-41
5-8-1-6. Load ......................................................................................................................... 5-41
5-8-1-7. Load(Stress Echo) .................................................................................................... 5-41
5-8-1-8. Load Again............................................................................................................... 5-42
5-8-1-9. Load Next................................................................................................................. 5-42
5-8-1-10. Load Previous .......................................................................................................... 5-42
5-8-1-11. Loop Mode (VCM) .................................................................................................. 5-42
5-8-1-12. Quad Position........................................................................................................... 5-42
5-8-1-13. Quad Position Setup................................................................................................. 5-43
5-8-1-14. Send to Storage ....................................................................................................... 5-43
5-8-1-15. Store (Stress Echo)................................................................................................... 5-43
5-8-1-16. Store on Disk............................................................................................................ 5-43
5-8-1-17. Stress Mode.............................................................................................................. 5-43
5-8-1-18. TV Sync ................................................................................................................... 5-44
5-8-1-19. Zoom (VCM) ........................................................................................................... 5-44
5-8-2. Option: EU-9083........................................................................................................................ 5-44
5-8-2-1. Protocol Select ......................................................................................................... 5-44
5-8-2-2. User Protocol ........................................................................................................... 5-44
5-8-3. Option: EU-9111........................................................................................................................ 5-45
5-8-3-1. Stress Echo Control ................................................................................................. 5-45
5-8-3-2. Protocol .................................................................................................................... 5-45
5-8-3-3. Pause Protocol.......................................................................................................... 5-45
5-8-3-4. Stress Acquire .......................................................................................................... 5-45
5-8-3-5. Priority Cycle Select ................................................................................................ 5-45
5-8-3-6. Skip View................................................................................................................. 5-46
5-8-3-7. Acquire Data Cancel ................................................................................................ 5-46
5-8-3-8. Label ........................................................................................................................ 5-46
5-8-3-9. Timer........................................................................................................................ 5-46
5-8-3-10. Shuffle...................................................................................................................... 5-46
5-8-3-11. Format(Quad)........................................................................................................... 5-47
5-8-3-12. Systolic Loop ........................................................................................................... 5-47
5-8-3-13. Systolic Loop,Time.................................................................................................. 5-47
5-8-3-14. Load(Continuous) .................................................................................................... 5-47
5-8-3-15. Continuous Acquire ................................................................................................. 5-47
5-8-3-16. Scoring ..................................................................................................................... 5-48
5-8-3-17. Scoring Report ......................................................................................................... 5-48
5-9. RT 3D Menu (The optional EU-9112 is necessary.) ................................................................................. 5-49
5-9-1. Image Parameter......................................................................................................................... 5-49
5-9-2. Scan Angle(3D).......................................................................................................................... 5-49
5-9-3. Line Density(3D) ....................................................................................................................... 5-49
5-9-4. Frame Density(3D)..................................................................................................................... 5-49
5-9-5. RefA ........................................................................................................................................... 5-50
5-9-6. RefB ........................................................................................................................................... 5-50
5-9-7. RefC ........................................................................................................................................... 5-50
8
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-8. 3D ............................................................................................................................................... 5-50

5-9-9. Reset(3D).................................................................................................................................... 5-50
5-9-10. Brightness(3D)............................................................................................................................ 5-50
5-9-11. Rendering Mode ......................................................................................................................... 5-51
5-9-12. Translation .................................................................................................................................. 5-51
5-9-13. Gamma (3D) ...............................................................................................................................5-51
5-9-14. Border Frame .............................................................................................................................. 5-51
5-9-15. Overlay Graphic.......................................................................................................................... 5-52
5-9-16. 3D Smooth .................................................................................................................................. 5-52
5-9-17. Smoothing (3D) .......................................................................................................................... 5-52
5-9-18. Function Indicator....................................................................................................................... 5-52
5-9-19. Orientation(3D)........................................................................................................................... 5-53
5-9-20. Detail Scan.................................................................................................................................. 5-53
5-9-21. Color Map (3D) .......................................................................................................................... 5-53
5-9-22. Erase Tool................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5-9-23. Erase Area Reset......................................................................................................................... 5-53
5-9-24. Loop (3D) ................................................................................................................................... 5-54
5-9-25. Loop Direction............................................................................................................................ 5-54
5-9-26. Rotation Axis .............................................................................................................................. 5-54
5-9-27. Step Angle .................................................................................................................................. 5-54
5-9-28. Rotation Angle............................................................................................................................ 5-54
5-9-29. Loop Speed ................................................................................................................................. 5-54
5-10. FAM Menu (The optional SOP-4000-11B is necessary.) .......................................................................... 5-55
5-10-1. Active FAM Off ......................................................................................................................... 5-55
5-10-2. Contrast (FAM) .......................................................................................................................... 5-55
5-10-3. Cursor Size.................................................................................................................................. 5-55
5-10-4. FAM Mode ................................................................................................................................. 5-55
5-10-5. Gamma (FAM) ........................................................................................................................... 5-55
5-10-6. Magnification (FAM) ................................................................................................................. 5-56
5-10-7. Multi FAM.................................................................................................................................. 5-56
5-10-8. PSAX .......................................................................................................................................... 5-56
5-10-9. Sweep Speed (FAM)................................................................................................................... 5-56
5-11. Contrast Harmonic Echo menu (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary) ........................................................... 5-57
5-11-1. Contrast Harmonic Echo............................................................................................................. 5-57
5-11-2. Intermittent Trigger Mode .......................................................................................................... 5-57
5-11-3. 2B Display .................................................................................................................................. 5-57
5-11-4. Select INTERM .......................................................................................................................... 5-57
5-11-5. INTERM Interval........................................................................................................................ 5-58
5-11-6. INTERM Frame.......................................................................................................................... 5-58
5-11-7. Sequence Start ............................................................................................................................ 5-58
5-11-8. Timer........................................................................................................................................... 5-58
9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6. Preset
6-1. PRESET function......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-2. Procedure for Changing the Set Contents .................................................................................................... 6-2
6-3. Common Preset ............................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6-3-1. Common Preset1 - 2..................................................................................................................... 6-5
6-3-2. Probe Menu .................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6-3-3. Print Select ................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6-3-4. VCM (Option: EU-9083 is necessary) ....................................................................................... 6-11
6-3-5. VCM (Option: EU-9111 is necessary) ....................................................................................... 6-13
6-3-6. DICOM Store/Send, Address, Printer........................................................................................ 6-16
6-4. Preset Control............................................................................................................................................. 6-19
6-4-1. Method of copying preset No. data to a floppy disk .................................................................. 6-20
6-4-2. When copying preset No. data inside the equipment................................................................. 6-21
6-4-3. When copying Preset No. data from a floppy disk .................................................................... 6-21
6-4-4. When rearranging Preset No. data ............................................................................................. 6-22
6-4-5. When copying data in Annotation Dictionary to a floppy disk ................................................. 6-22
6-4-6. When copying data in Annotation Dictionary from a floppy disk............................................. 6-22
6-4-7. When copying Body Mark Library from a floppy disk ............................................................. 6-23
6-4-8. When copying Common Preset data to a floppy disk ................................................................ 6-23
6-4-9. When copying Common Preset data from a floppy disk ........................................................... 6-23
6-4-10. When copying Color Map to a floppy disk................................................................................ 6-24
6-4-11. When copying Color Map from a floppy disk ........................................................................... 6-24
6-5. Preset Set-up Menu .................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-6. DISP-B, -M,D,-Flow, -ID,Comment, -Graphics........................................................................................ 6-26
6-7. Image 1 - 2, Focus, Post Processing........................................................................................................... 6-33
6-8. Body Mark ................................................................................................................................................. 6-39
6-9. Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-40
6-10. Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW .................................................................................................. 6-41
6-11. Physio Signal.............................................................................................................................................. 6-43
6-12. Doppler....................................................................................................................................................... 6-44
6-13. Flow ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-46
6-14. Power Flow ................................................................................................................................................ 6-49
6-15. Tissue Doppler ........................................................................................................................................... 6-52
6-16. Tissue Flow ................................................................................................................................................ 6-54
6-17. Tissue Power Flow..................................................................................................................................... 6-57
6-18. Stress Echo (Option: EU-9083 is necessary) ............................................................................................. 6-60
6-19. eStress Echo (Option: EU-9111 is necessary) ........................................................................................... 6-61
6-20. Contrast Echo............................................................................................................................................. 6-63
6-21. RT3D (Option: EU-9112 is necessary)...................................................................................................... 6-65
6-22. Biopsy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-69
10
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-1.Operation panel
1. OPERATION METHOD
1-1. Operation panel
The methods of operating the various switches are described below.
Rotary encoder 3
Rotary encoder 2
POWER DISK CAPS LOCK FUNCTION
NEW FRAME ACOUST SWEEP I.P. ELEMENT

EXT PRESET ANGLE PROBE SELECT
PATIENT RATE POWER SPEED SELECT
SAMPLE VOLUME DOP FILTER CONTRAST IMAGE/FREQ
STC
Menu selecting
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 Pause Insert Delete
switch
Break
0
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Back MENU 1
1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Space
2
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
Tab 3
[ ]
5
Caps A S D F G H J K L : "
Lock 8
; '
12
Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? Shift 14
, . / PgUp
(cm)
Ctrl ID Alt Alt Gr Fn Ctrl Clear
Home PgDn End

D.D.D. ACQUIRE
HARMONIC
Arrow key
CURSOR BODY SCAN INVERT ECHO
SEARCH USER 1 FOCUS ZOOM
/B.L.S MARK AREA
M/D GAIN STEER POWER

VEL RANGE DEPTH/RANGE
REVIEW USER 2 /ROTAT FLOW
B M D PW
MEASURE CW
STORE CLEAR
MENT
FLOW GAIN
B B B M B D FLOW
VCM REPORT SET CANCEL
SELECT
MARK REF
REC
B GAIN
Rotary encoder 1
Fig. Operation panel
Rotary encoder 1 Used to set the measurement and zoom functions.
Rotary encoder 2 Used to set the menu settings.
Rotary encoder 3 Used when any of the 5 switches on the left panel is pressed.
This section consists of 86 pages.

1-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-2.Graphic Display
1-2. Graphic Display

(3)
ALOKA ALOKA :No ID : Y '00/02/28

H O P S P I TA L : : M 11 : 2 3 : 3 6
(1) 511/512 1
54Hz
(4)
3. 8 R 1 7 G 8 1 C 5 A 2
MI = 1.0 DVA=89%
(2) 1:Abdomen TIS< 0.4
Fig. B mode image
(1) Gray scale bar
(2) Scale mark
(3) Active mark

A[ ] mark indicates an active state (An active image is the image on which operations can be performed
when two or more images are displayed.)
A[ ] mark indicates a non − active state.
(4) Focus mark

[Remark]
For details, refer to Section 9 of “Safety Instruction”.
1-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3.Operating the various switches
1-3. Operating the various switches

The methods of operating the various switches are described below.
1-3-1. ACOUST POWER

The ACOUST POWER function enables the acoustic power to be manually adjusted from the automatic setting.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the ACOUST POWER switch.

→ Possible to set the acoustic output value.
(2) Using rotary encoder 3, adjust the output to the optimum value.
→ Turning rotary encoder 3 clockwise causes the output to increase, and vice − versa. At the same time,
the output value on the image changes.
(3) Press the ACOUST POWER switch to terminate this function.

[Remark]
In order to prevent a malfunction, the lamp in the ACOUST POWER switch goes out automatically after 5 seconds
and the function is terminated, even if a function termination operation is not performed.
1-3-2. ACQUIRE
This switch enables the VCM( Video Cine Memory ) to acquire an image from the equipment.
<Operation method>
(1) Display the optimum image, and press the ACQUIRE switch.
→ The image is acquired to the memory.
1-3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-3. ANGLE
The ANGLE function corrects the flow velocity value according to the angle of incidence of the Doppler beam.
Use it when you wish to calculate the correct flow velocity.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the ANGLE switch.

→ The switch lights orange.
(2) Perform angle correction with rotary encoder3.

→ The ANGLE value appears at top right of the B mode screen. Turn rotary encoder to change this value.
(3) Press the ANGLE switch.

→ The polarity of the set angle reverses.
(4) Press the ANGLE switch again to terminate the function.

→ The ANGLE value returns to 0 degrees.
[Remark]
You cannot perform angle correction when the angle is 80 degrees or more because the error is too large.
1-3-4. BODY MARK

Displays and sets a body mark.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the BODYMARK switch.

→ The body mark appears on the screen.
(2) Set the position of the probe mark.

→ Move the probe mark with the trackball, and rotate the probe mark with rotary encoder 1.
(3) Press the BODYMARK switch.

→ The body mark is erased.
[Remark]
The fetus mark has a rotation function for examining a reverse fetus.
a. Display the fetus mark, then press the MARK REF switch.
b. Rotate the fetus mark with the rotary encoder 1.
c. Press the MARK REF switch.

→ The rotary encoder 1 returns to the rotation function facing the probe mark.
1-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(Changing the body mark)

[Remark]
Using a preset, assign Body Mark Menu to a menu.
a. Press the MENU switch.

→ The menu appears on the left side of the screen.
b. Select the Body Mark Menu with rotary encoder 2, and press the Menu selecting switch.
→ The list of the body marks that can be selected appears on the screen.
Locate
Cancel
c. Move the arrow to the body mark to be displayed, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected body mark appears on the screen.
d. Press the MENU switch.

→ The MENU disappears.
1-3-5. CANCEL
Used to interrupt a selected motion or return to the previous step during measurement.
1-3-6. CLEAR
Used mainly to end measurement.
1-5
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-7. COMMENT
These functions are used to enter characters into the text area.
You can use a preset to set whether the annotation function or the comment function is activated when the Comment
key is pressed.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the Comment key on the keyboard.

→ The arrow appears at top left of the text area.
(2) Using the trackball or arrow key, move the arrow to the position of the word that you wish to enter.
(3) Enter the first letter of the word that you wish to display.
→ An underline cursor appears beneath the character to be entered, and keywords whose first letter is the
same as the selected letter appear in the annotation window.
(Annotation function)
[Remark]
Twenty words are displayed for one search. If the target word is not found, enter addi-
tional characters in order to narrow the search.
[Remark]
Search for words using the dictionaries inside the equipment (DIC1 − 6).
When switching over to a dictionary, press the Ctrl and D key simultaneously, then you
can change the dictionary to a new one in the word registration window.
(4) Select a keyword in the annotation window using one of the arrow keys or the Rotary encoder1 on the key-
board.
→ Words corresponding to the selected keyword appear in the automatic display area.
1-6
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(5) Press the SET switch or the return key.

→ The word is finalized.
[Remark]
You can display a word either in abbreviated form or in full spelling using a preset.
[Remark]
When you press the Ctrl key and the A key on the keyboard simultaneously, the annotation function goes Off, and
the comment function in which the entered character remains unchanged is activated.
(6) Press the Comment key.

→ The comment function is terminated.
[Remark]
You can DISP-ID,Comment− time normal size characters by using a preset or the menu.
1) Registering keywords and words
(1) Press the Comment key.

→ The arrow appears on the text area.
(2) Press the Ctrl key and the D key at the same time.
→ The word registration window appears.
(3) Point to the to DIC 1, and press the SET switch.

→ The dictionary is changed.
(4) Point to Key, and press the SET switch.
(5) Enter a keyword. (Max 8 characters)

→ The same character as the entered character is automatically input to the Word area.
(6) Press the SET switch or the Return key.

→ The keyword is finalized.
(7) When you wish to change a character registered in the Word area, move the mark to the Word area, and
press the SET switch.
→ Enter the desired word. (Max 54 characters)
(8) Press the SET switch or the Return key.

→ The keyword is finalized.
1-7
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(9) After entering all items, move to the mark to OK, and press the SET switch.
→ The word is registered in the dictionary.
[Remark]
The word is registered in the currently selected dictionary.
2) Moving a word
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the place where you wish to move the word.
→ A character cursor appears alongside the character.
(2) Press the MARK REF switch.

→ The word is displayed with black and white reversed, indicating that it can be moved.
(3) Move the word using the trackball.

→ The position of the word is finalized.
1-8
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3) Deleting a word
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the word that you wish to delete.
→ A character cursor appears alongside one of the characters of the word.
(2) Press the Del key on the keyboard.

→ The specified word is deleted.
[Remark]
If you press the Del key without specifying a word using the arrow, all of the words on the screen will disappear,
and the arrow will return to position in which it was set by the preset.
[Remark]
You can delete all of the words on the screen by canceling the freeze condition with a preset.
4) Deleting a character
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the right of the character that you wish to delete.
→ A character cursor appears to the right of the character.
(2) Press the ← key (backspace key) at top right of the keyboard.
→ The character to the left of the character cursor disappears.
1-9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-8. CONTRAST
The CONTRAST function corrects the contrast of the image.
The contrast level can be varied through 16 steps.
For B and 2B modes : B mode image adjustment
For B/M and M modes : M mode image adjustment (In the B/M mode, you can also adjust a B mode image with
the SELECT switch.)
For B/D and D modes : D mode image adjustment (In the B/D mode, you can also adjust a B mode image with
the SELECT switch.)
<Operation method>
: Increases the contrast.
: Decreases the contrast.
1-3-9. CURSOR/B.L.S
This switch is used to move or set the cursor and the baseline of the Doppler pattern.
<CURSOR>
<Operation method>
(1) Change over from the B mode display to the B/M mode display.
→ The CURSOR/B.L.S switch automatically glows orange, and the cursor appears on the B mode image.
(2) Using the trackball, move the cursor to the position where you wish to detect the M mode.
(3) Press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch to terminate this function.

→ The cursor remains displayed, but you can no longer move it with the trackball.
[Remark]
The method of operating the cursor in the B/D mode is the same as the description above.
The cursor cannot be moved on the frozen image.
1-10
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<B.L.S. (BASE LINE SHIFT)>

By shifting the baseline, the Doppler pattern can be displayed without the aliasing.
<Operation method>
(1) Change the display from the B mode to the B/D mode.
→ The CURSOR/B.L.S switch automatically glows orange, and the cursor is displayed on the B mode
image.
(2) Adjust the position of the baseline with rotary encoder 1.
(3) Press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch, reset the position of the baseline.
→ The baseline is reset at the center position.
(4) Once again, press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch.

→ The function is terminated, and the CURSOR/B.L.S switch lights green.
1-3-10. DDD
This function enables you to observe a B mode (black and white) image and a Flow mode image side by side in real-
time.
In this case, the B+Flow mode image is displayed on the right half of the screen, and the B mode image on the left
half.
If you switch over to the B mode after you freeze the image, only a B+Flow image will be displayed, and use the
search function to display previous images.
[Remark]
This function also operates in the Power mode.
You cannot perform a search on the left and right images separately after freezing the images.
<Operation method>
(1) Display the B/Flow mode, and press the DDD switch.
→ The same images appear in monochrome and color.
[Remark]
A color real-time image and a monochrome real-time image can not be displayed at the same time, if the flow is not
displayed before the DDD is entered.
1-11
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-11. DEPTH/RANGE
The DEPTH/RANGE function switches over the display depth of the image.
The display depth is switched over based on the transmission point of the displayed image.
The depth is common to both the B and M mode images. The display depth that was last set remains, even if the
mode changes.
You cannot change the display depth of a frozen image.
<Operation method>
: Pressing this switch increases the display depth (reduces the image).
The greatest depth is obtained by pressing the switch continuously until the depth no longer
increases.
: Pressing this switch decreases the display depth (enlarges the image).
The least depth is obtained by pressing this switch continuously until the depth no longer decreases.
[Remark]
Each switch lights green when it can function and goes out when it cannot function.
When a switch (that can function) is pressed, it lights orange for 1 second.
1-3-12. DOP FILTER

The DOP FILTER function removes high level noise in the low frequency region that occurs due to the motion of
the heart wall, etc.
Use it when the high frequency components of the bloodstream are suppressed, preventing a clear image from being
obtained.
<Operation method>
: Increases the degree of filter cut.
When FILTER CONTROL (D) is AUTO, the degree of filter cut can be changed in 1→ 12.
When FILTER CONTROL (D) is Manual, the degree of filter cut can be changed in 50Hz→
100Hz→ 200Hz→ 400Hz→ 800Hz→ 1600Hz.
: Decreases the degree of filter cut.

When FILTER CONTROL (D) is AUTO, the degree of filter cut can be changed in 12→ 1.
When FILTER CONTROL (D) is Manual, the degree of filter cut can be changed in 600Hz→
800Hz→ 400Hz→ 200Hz→ 100Hz→ 50Hz.
1-12
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-13. ELEMENT SELECT

This switch alternates the active transducer when an intra-cavity probe having 2 transducers is used.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the ELEMENT SELECT switch.

→ The transducer changes.
[Remark]
When using a trans esophageal probe that has two transducers, T (Transverse) and L (Longitudinal) appear on the
screen.
1-3-14. EXT
This function switches between the normal display of ultrasound images (INT state) and the display of external sig-
nals such as VTR images (EXT state).
Normally, it is set to the INT state.
If you press the FREEZE switch when a video image is displayed on the screen in the EXT condition, the image at
that point in time will be stored in the VCR MEMORY.
You can enter comments on this screen, or print out the contents of the screen.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the EXT switch.

→ The switch lights orange, indicating that the equipment is in an EXT state.
(2) Press the EXT switch once again.

→ The switch lights up in green and the image display returns to the ordinary INT state.
1-13
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-15. FOCUS
The FOCUS function converges the ultrasound beam to make a clearer image.
You can change the focal points used when transmitting ultrasound beams.
B mode image has sending points F1 to F8 that divide the maximum diagnostic distance in the distance direction
into eight parts. You can set the focus at up to any four of these points.
In the case of an M mode image, one optimum focal point is set automatically near the center of the display range.
(The display range varies with the display depth and the M-WINDOW.) The above also applies when only a M mode
image is displayed.
In the case of a B/D mode display, one focal point is set according to the sample volume.
Also, when an M mode image or a D mode image in a B/* mode display is frozen, you can perform multi-stage focus
setting.
[Remark]
You cannot set all focal points to OFF. One points is always set as a focal point.
<Operation method>
Select the auto focus or the manual focus on the menu.
For details, refer to “5. Menu”.
(1) Press the FOCUS switch.

→ The transmission focus position can be set.
(2) Using the trackball, move the transmission focus position.

→ Rolling the trackball up moves the transmission focus position to the shallow depth point, and rolling
the trackball down moves the transmission focus position to the deep depth point.
[Remark]
When focusing at two or more points, you can change the distance between the focal points by using
rotary encoder 1.
[Remark]
The focus position can not go outside the displayed depth in AUTO focus.
[Remark]
After changing the focus position to any place in AUTO focus, changing the depth with the DEPTH/RANGE switch
changes the focus position to the optimum position according to the changed depth.
[Remark]
In Manual focus, the focus position can go to the maximum depth that the probe has. It is also possible to change the
setting so that the changing the depth does not change the focus position.
Note
If you set multiple focus points, that results in obtaining an image with high resolution, but decreasing the
frame rate.
Select the optimum setting so as to suit the desired body part while checking the acoustic power index.
1-14
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-16. FRAME RATE

This function enables you to adjust the frame rate by setting the combination of Line Density (scanning line density)
for black & white and color images, in the Flow mode or the Power Flow mode.
The relation between the Frame Rate value and the Line Density for black and white and color images is shown be-
low.
Frame Rate −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Line Density (black or white) High High High MED MED MED Low Low Low
Line Density (color) High MED Low High MED Low High MED Low
<Operation method>
(1) Press the FRAME RATE switch.
→ The switch glows orange
(2) Adjust the frame rate with rotary encoder 3.

[Remark]
When the frame rate is changed, the size of the flow area may also change.
Note
Increasing the frame rate increases the power index.
1-3-17. FREEZE
The FREEZE function freezes a moving image.
When you press the FREEZE switch, the B mode image freezes upon the completion of one ultrasound wave scan,
and the M and D mode images freeze immediately, or the M and D mode images freeze just after they are displayed
completely.
Also, the date and time indication and probe transmission stop.
[Remark]
In order to protect the equipment, you can set the equipment so that the freeze condition automatically goes ON when
you do not perform a panel operation for a certain period. (You can set this period to between 1 and 20 minutes using
a preset. You can also turn this function OFF when you wish to use the monitor for a long period.
For details, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.)
By connecting an optional foot switch, you can turn the freeze function ON and OFF using either the FREEZE
switch or the foot switch.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the FREEZE switch.
→ The switch lights orange, and the displayed image freezes.

→ The switch lights green, and the frozen image becomes a moving image.
1-15
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-18. GAIN
The GAIN function adjusts the sensitivity of the B, M and D mode images.
(B GAIN)
The GAIN knob adjusts the sensitivity of B and M mode images.
The sensitivity (gain) can be varied between 30 and 90 dB, and is displayed on the screen.
(M/D GAIN)
M mode : This control is used to perform auxiliary adjustment of the M mode image sensitivity after the B mode
image sensitivity has been adjusted with the B GAIN control.
D mode : Used to adjust the intensity of the spectrum display on Doppler images.
(FLOW GAIN)
The flow gain adjusts the color sensitivity on the color Doppler images.
[Remark]
You can set the gain at startup by means of a preset, however depending upon the conditions of the probe, and so
on, the gain may not always match the dB value displayed on the screen.
<Operation method>
(1) Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise.

→ Turning the knob clockwise increases the image sensitivity, and vice-versa, for both B GAIN, M/D
GAIN and FLOW GAIN.
(2) While observing an image, adjust the sensitivity to a suitable level.
1-16
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-19. HARMONIC ECHO (Option : SOP-4000-12B is necessary.)

By using a probe that can receive a harmonic echo, you can perform image processing using the second harmonic
wave reflected from the tissue, resulting in a clear image that has minimal artifacts such as side lobes.
While this function is being used, the sending frequency is displayed as a highlighted number, and the received
frequency is expressed as H (High Resolution), R (Resolution), S (Standard) and P (Penetration) in that sequence.
H gives priority to resolution and P gives priority to sensitivity.
[Remark]
Note that it can only be used with certain probes.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the HARMONIC ECHO switch.

→ The second harmonic wave is received.
(2) Press the IMAGE/FREQ switch.

→ The received frequency changes.
(3) Press the HARMONIC ECHO switch to terminate this function.
Note
This function cannot be used for the second harmonic that is obtained when the chemical agents such as con-
trast media for ultrasound diagnosis are used.
1-3-20. ID
During an examination, the patient data (ID No., name, etc.) is displayed on the screen. You can change the entered
data.
For details, refer to Section 1-4. “Before Starting an Examination”.
1-17
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-21. IMAGE/FREQ
This function switches the transmitting/receiving frequencies of the probe in a maximum of 4 steps. The sensitivity
priority and the image quality priority can be selected for each probe. When using a Doppler display or a color dis-
play, you can change the Doppler frequency. The transmitting frequencies are displayed on the lower left of the
screen automatically.
<Operation method>
: Raises the transmitting/receiving frequency.
: Lowers the transmitting/receiving frequency.
Note
If you select the low frequency, that results in making an image with the higher sensitivity and the lower
resolution.
If you select the high frequency, that results in obtaining an image with high resolution, but reducing the
sensitivity.
1-18
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-22. INVERT
This function displays a B mode laterally reversed.
If you reverse an image, the various marks attendant to the image (direction marks, cursor, etc.) are reversed simul-
taneously. In addition, this function can operate for images on the cine memory.
[Remark]
The center of reversal of the image is the center of the image.
When a D mode image is displayed, the image is reversed about the baseline vertically.
This makes the data of the blood flowing toward the probe and the data of the blood flowing away from the probe
be displayed reversibly.
<Operation method>
For the B mode
(1) Press the INVERT switch.

→ The B mode image is reversed laterally.
CURSOR
Fig. Reversed laterally
For the D mode

→ The D mode image is reversed vertically.

→ The vertically reversed D mode image returns to the original image.
[Remark]
You cannot reverse the D mode image vertically after freezing it.
1-19
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-23. IP SELECT (Image Processing Select)

Simultaneously carry out multiple settings concerned with adjustment of picture quality in the B, M, D, FLOW,
POWER FLOW, TDI D, TDI FLOW, TDI POWER FLOW modes to adjust the overall feeling (hard-soft) of the
image quality.
In the B mode it is possible to adjust Frame Correlation, Contrast, AGC and Relief.
In the M mode it is possible to adjust Contrast, AGC and Relief.
In the D, TDI D mode it is possible to adjust Contrast, Compression Curve (D), Smoothing, Resolution and Image
Select (D).
In the FLOW, POWER FLOW, TDI FLOW, TDI POWER FLOW mode it is possible to adjust Frame Correlation,
Smoothing and Image Select (Flow).
These functions are set on 8 levels and can be preset. For details, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the IP SELECT switch.

→ Change the setting value with rotary encoder 3.
(2) Press the IP SELECT switch.

→ This function is terminated.
[Remark]
The setting value is displayed in the message area for 5 seconds.
[Remark]
It is not possible to change these functions during freeze.
1-3-24. MEASUREMENT
Press this switch to activate the measurement function.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the MEASUREMENT switch.

→ The measurement menu is displayed on the screen.
(2) Perform measurement according to the measurement procedure.
For details, refer to the Measurement manual.
1-20
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-25. MENU
This switch is used to displays menus.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the MENU switch.

→ The menu is displayed on the left side of the screen.
(2) Select the item with rotary encoder 2, follow the setting procedure to register it.
→ For details, refer to Section 5. “Menu”.
1-3-26. MODE
The MODE function sets the mode of images to be displayed on the screen.
The modes that can be displayed are as follows:
B B/B B/M M B/D PW CW FLOW POWERFLOW
[Remark]
In the case of a compound mode (B/M, B/D), the corresponding mode switch also functions to display both images
simultaneously as a real time display.
<Operation method>
: The equipment enters the B mode (only a B mode image is displayed on the screen).
B
: The equipment enters the 2B mode (two images are displayed on the screen).
B B
: The equipment enters the B/M mode (one B mode image and one M mode image are displayed
B M on the screen).
: The equipment enters the M mode (only an M mode image is displayed on the screen).
M
: The equipment enters the D mode (only an D mode image is displayed on the screen).
D
: The equipment enters the B/D mode (Both a B mode image and a D mode image are displayed
B D on the screen).
PW : Switches the PW/CW mode with some of the electronic sector probes.
CW
[Remark]
The CW mode can be selected only when the optional UCW-4000 is connected to the equipment.
: Displays a B mode image or an M mode image in color.

FLOW
POWER : Displays a B mode image or an M mode image in Power Flow.

FLOW
1-21
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Request function>
This function enables you to call and display one image of a two-image screen display, such as a 2B, B/M or B/D
mode display, after performing a freeze operation.
If you freeze an image, the switch, of the B/B, B/M or B/D switches, that corresponds to the currently displayed
mode lights orange, and the operable switch, of the B, M or D switches, lights green.
The transition diagram for each mode is shown in the figure below.
*2B mode
B B
or
SELECT
① ② ① ②
B B B B B B
B
② ①
or
SELECT
1-22
MN1-1174 Rev.9
*B/M mode *B/M mode

(a) Left-right display (b) Upper-lower display
M M
B M B M
B M B B M B
B M B M
Fig. Transition diagram
*B/D mode *B/D mode

(a) Left-right display (b) Upper-lower display
D D
B D B D
B D B B D B
B D B D
Fig. Transition diagram
1-23
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-27. PRESET
This function enables you to switch over to a preset that is suitable for the area being diagnosed, or to change the set
contents.
For the method of changing the set contents, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the PRESET switch.

→ The preset list is displayed on the screen.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to a preset that you desired to set, and press the SET switch.
→ The set conditions registered in the selected preset are activated.
1-3-28. PRINT
The PRINT function records images to recording equipment connected to this equipment.
When you set a recording device, the optimum gamma correction for that recording device will be applied, enabling
you to record images in a reasonably short time.
For details, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
[Remark]
If the recording equipment set with the preset is different to the actual equipment used for recording, correct record-
ing will not take place.
<Operation method>
(1) Display the optimum image, then press the FREEZE switch to freeze the image.
(2) Press the switch.

→ The image is recorded.
[Remark]
You cannot record an image while it is displayed in real time.
1-24
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-29. PROBE
The probe function selects the probe to be used when several probes are connected to the equipment.
[Remark]
If the probe is registered with the probe menu of the Preset beforehand, it may be convenient.
For details, Section 6-3. “COMMON PRESET”.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the PROBE switch when the freeze status is Off.
→ A menu of probe such as the following example is displayed.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the probe that you wish to use, and press the SET switch.
→ The image of probe selected is displayed.
[Remark]
The corresponding button switch for the probe that is operated currently is selected.
(3) When selecting the probe which is not registered with the Preset, move arrow to the Next button with
trackball and press the SET switch.
→ A menu of probe such as the following example is displayed.
The number of 1 through 3 on the

probe menu corresponds to the
number of probe connector.
(4) Move arrow to the numbered connector connecting to the probe intended to use with the trackball and press
the SET switch.
→ The image of probe selected is displayed.
1-25
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-30. REC
This function records images into the VCR that is connected to the system.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the REC switch.

→ VCR recording will start.
(2) Once again, press the REC switch.

→ Recording pauses.
1-3-31. REPORT
The REPORT function enables the results of each measurement and also the measured values and information
related to the patient to be presented in the form of a table.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the REPORT switch upon completion of measurement.

→ The measurement report is displayed.
[Remark]
The measurements that have report screens are obstetrical measurements, gynecological measurements, cardiac
function measurements, peripheral vessel measurements and urethral measurements.
For details, refer to “Measurement manual”.
1-3-32. REVIEW
This function reviews the stored images.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the REVIEW switch.

→ The stored image is displayed.
For details, refer to Section 2. “CINE MEMORY AND STORE IMAGE”.
1-26
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-33. SAMPLE VOLUME

This function sets the sample volume.
The sample volume is the volume of the sample gate that extracts the signals from the B mode image in the PW
Doppler mode.
<Operation method>
: Increases the sample gate.
: Decreases the sample gate.

[Remark]
The volume of the sample gate can be changed from 0.5mm to 10mm in 0.5mm step.
The volume of the sample gate is displayed for 5 seconds on the message area after the SAMPLE VOLUME switch
is pressed.
1-3-34. SCAN AREA

The SCAN AREA function continuously enlarges or reduces the scanning range of B mode images.
It can raise the frame rate without shortening the display depth, by reducing the scanning area.
When the scanning range is less than the maximum scanning range, you can move it left or right with the trackball.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the SCAN AREA switch.

→ You can now enlarge, reduce or shift the scanning area.
(2) Using the rotary encoder 1, enlarge or reduce the image.

→ Turning the rotary encoder clockwise or counterclockwise causes the image to increase or decrease.
[Remark]
The reference point for enlargement or reduction is the center of the scanning range.
(3) Using the trackball, shift the scanning range.

→ Rolling the trackball to the right or left causes the scanning range to shift to the right or left. (Steering
function)
[Remark]
You can enlarge or reduce the image about its center even after shifting the scanning range.
[Remark]
If the cursor is displayed, the cursor shifts along with the scanning range as the cursor approaches the end of the
scanning range.
1-27
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-35. SELECT
This function selects an active image when several images are displayed (in the 2B mode, B/M mode, B/D mode
display, etc.)
<Operation method>
(1) Display multiple images.
(2) Press the SELECT switch.

→ When displaying only one of two images in real time in the 2B mode, for example, the real time display
will switch over. In the case where two images are displayed in real time, such as in the B/M or the
B/D mode, only the M image or the D image will be displayed in real time.

→ The real time display of the left and right images switches over.

→ Both the left and right images freeze.

→ The active image switches over.

→ The active side image is displayed in real time.
1-28
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-36. SEARCH
This function displays the image stored in the cine memory.
<Operation method>
(2) Press the SEARCH switch.

[Remark]
You can select whether to enter the search function or to enter the scroll function automatically in the Preset.
(3) Using the trackball, search for the image to be displayed.

[Remark]
When displaying multiple images, use the trackball for the active side, and the rotary encoder for the non-active side.
[Remark]
You can perform measurement, for example, on a searched screen, however in this case the trackball will be used
for the measurement, preventing you from using it for the search function. If you wish to use the search function
again, proceed from step (2).
1-3-37. STC
The STC function is an 8-step slide variable resistor which adjusts the gain at each display depth.
The gain of both B mode and M mode images varies simultaneously.
The number (cm) displayed on the side of each STC knob indicates the display depth for which the gain can be ad-
justed.
<Operation method>
[Remark]
Normally, set the STC knobs to the center (reference) position.
(1) Move the STC knobs to the left or right.

→ Moving the knobs to the right or left increases or decreases the gain for the display depth.
Adjust the knobs corresponding to the depths where there is a deviation in sensitivity, either left or right,
so as to make the sensitivity uniform.
[Remark]
The GAIN function also adjusts the gain.
1-29
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-38. STORE
This function stores the image frozen or searched to HDD in system, MO disk, or the network server.
<Operation method>
(1) Display the image you wish to store.
(2) Press the STORE switch.

→ A image is stored in the store place set up beforehand.
[Remark]
For details, refer to Section 2. “CINE MEMORY AND STORE IMAGE”.
1-3-39. STEER/ROTAT
There are two functions: Steering Invert and Image Rotation.
[Remark]
You can select either of them in the Preset.
<Steering invert>
When you inspect the blood flow in the carotid and others with the electronic linear probe, it is hard to obtain the
data on the part in which the blood flow is orthogonal to the ultrasound.
The steered beam function steers the ultrasound electronically to obtain the data on the study part.
[Remark]
The angle of the ultrasound can be changed in step of 5 degrees (max ± 15 degrees).
However, some probes can not reach the range of ± 15 degrees.
For details, refer to Section 5. “MENU”.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the STEER/ROTAT switch.

→ The ultrasound beam is emitted at the angle set by the preset.
(2) Once again, press the STEER/ROTAT switch.

→ The ultrasonic beam changes to a reverse direction angle.
Pressing the STEER/ROTAT switch once again causes the angle of the ultrasonic beam to become 0°.
[Remark]
In the Preset, you can set the angle of the ultrasound that is transmitted when the STEER/ROTAT switch is pressed.
1-30
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Image Rotation>
This function rotates the displayed B mode image by 90 degrees.
If you rotate an image, the various marks attendant to the image (direction marks, cursor, etc.) are rotated simulta-
neously.
In addition, this function can operate for images on the cine memory.
However, the M mode image cannot be rotated.
[Remark]
The center of rotation of the image is the center of the image.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the STEER/ROTAT switch.

→ The displayed B mode image function is rotated by 90 degrees.
1-3-40. SWEEP SPEED

This function sets the sweep speed used when the M mode image or D mode image is displayed.
You can set the sweep time from the right edge of the screen to the left edge.
For the M mode image, M should be 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 (sec/screen).
For the D mode image, D should be 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 (sec/screen).
In the case of a B/M or B/D mode display, the sweep time becomes about 2/3 that of an M mode display.
The marks are displayed from the right to the left on M mode or D mode image every 0.5 seconds.
However, in the case of a real-time display, this mark appears only at the top and bottom ends of the image. When
the image is frozen, the mark appears at fixed intervals from the top end to the bottom end.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the SWEEP SPEED switch.

→ The switch glows orange.
(2) Set the speed with rotary encoder 3.

→ Turning the encoder right increases the speed, and turning left decreases the speed.
1-31
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-41. VCM ( Video Cine Memory )

[Remark]
This switch cannot be used unless the optional EU-9083 or EU-9111 is connected.
This function is used to acquire image data for multi frames to a VCM, perform loop playback of the data, store it
in a disk, send it to a network, and so on.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the VCM switch.

→ The VCM function is activated.
Refer to Section 2. “CINE MEMORY AND STORE IMAGE”
1-3-42. VEL RANGE

This function enlarges and reduces the range of the flow velocity (the display range of the flow velocity).
In the case of PW Doppler, the flow velocity range is enlarged or reduced between 0.06 and max 3.19cm/s.
This function also adjusts the display range of the flow velocity for the color Doppler (0.06 to 1.99 m/s).
[Remark]
When you change VEL RANGE in the color Doppler mode, the size of the flow area sometimes changes as well.
<Operation method>
: Press this switch.
→ Increases the velocity range.
The maximum range is reached when the switch is no longer effective.
: Press this switch.

→ Decreases the velocity range.
The minimum range is reached when the switch is no longer effective.
1-32
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-43. ZOOM
The ZOOM function enlarges or reduces part of a B mode image.
The ZOOM has two methods for setting and can be switched over the setting with the preset.
If the setting of Zoom Method is made to the Center, you can magnify or contract an image around the center.
If the setting of Zoom Method is made to the Box, you can have a ROI displaying a magnified area, in which the
image is enlarged or reduced.
The magnified image is also movable.
The focal points of the enlarged image are automatically set near the center of the display range.
Shown below are examples of automatic setting.
<Examples>
• Automatically setting the focal points uniformly at the center of the display range according to the number
of focal points
• Shifting the focal points along with the shift of the image
• Setting the number of steps for multi-step focusing
[Remark]
You can also use this function to shift an image without enlarging it.
<Operation method>
(When the Preset is at the Center)
(1) Press the ZOOM switch.

→ The switch lights up in orange.
(2) Turn the rotary encoder 1 clockwise.

→ The image is enlarged one step at a time from the center.
This switch ceases to function when the image reaches the maximum size.
(3) Turn the rotary encoder 1 counterclockwise.

→ The image is reduced one step at a time from the center.
This switch ceases to function when the image reaches the minimum size.
(4) Using the trackball, move the image.

→ You can also enlarge or reduce the image after shifting it.

→ The zoom is reset, and the image returns to its original size and position.
(ZOOM in the B/D mode)

When the “Zoom Lock” is selected on the menu, a B mode image is enlarged with the sample volume position being
as a center in the PW mode, or with the angle mark position being as a center in the CW mode.
For details, refer to Section 5-7-40. “Zoom Lock”.
1-33
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(When the Preset is at Box)

→ ROI is displayed on the image.
(2) Turn the Rotary encoder 1 from clockwise or counterclockwise.

→ ROI magnifies or contracts itself.
(3) Move the ROI to the part wanted to magnify with the trackball.

→ An image is magnified.
Turning the rotary encoder 1 from clockwise or counterclockwise, you can magnify or contract an
image.

→ The zoom is reset, and the image returns to its original size and position.
[Remark]
The magnification and the position of the zoomed area are memorized in the system until the PRESET,
DEPTH/RANGE, or NEW PATIENT switch is pressed.
1-3-43-1. Read Zoom

Read zoom is a function that displays a frozen B mode image at a magnification of 2 when the ZOOM switch is
pressed.
You can use this function for the images stored in the Cine memory.
It is also possible to operate the Read Zoom during a loop play.
The position of the image that is enlarged twice by the Read Zoom can be moved.
<Operation method>
(1) Press the FREEZE switch to freeze an image.
(2) Press the ZOOM switch

→ The image is enlarged twice.
(3) Using the trackball, move the enlarged B mode image.

→ Read Zoom is reset.
1-34
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-3-44. Full keyboard

The full keyboard of this equipment performs the same function as the keyboard of a general purpose computer, the
only difference being that some keys also have functions unique to the equipment.

Break
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Back
1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Space
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
Tab
[ ]
Lock ; '
Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? Shift

, . / PgUp
Home PgDn End
Fig. Full keyboard
<Full keyboard function>
(1) Comment and Annotation functions

For details, refer to Section 1-3-7. “COMMENT”.
(2) ID entry function

For details, refer to Section 1-4. “Before Starting an Examination”.
(3) The full keyboard function can start up the measurement directly.
When you press an alphabet key, you can directly start the measurement items and the control functions that
are assigned to the pressed key without going to the measurement menu.
(4) VCM function

When the VCM function is ON, you can directly start the functions assigned to the function keys.
1-35
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-4.Before Starting an Examination
1-4. Before Starting an Examination

The ID function is used to enter patient data (ID number, name, etc.) and display it on the screen. You can use the
entered data for displaying a report, for example.
1-4-1. Explanation of an ID entry screen

Pressing the NEW PATIENT switch displays the ID entry screen shown below.
Fig. ID entry screen
Search
Searches patient information from the patient database in the system, and displays it on the ID entry screen.
Find
Reads patient data from the HIS (Hospital Information System) to the equipment, and displays it in the form of a list.
Worklist
Displays a list of patient data read from the HIS.
[Remark]
You cannot select patient data unless it has been read from the HIS.
Data Management
Stores the patient information to the external media (MO or FD), reads it from the external media, and deletes it from
the system or the external media.
1-36
MN1-1174 Rev.9
ID Input
You can select one of the following four methods of entering ID data by performing the ID Input operation of the
menu.
(1) ID Name : Entering ID, name, age and sex
(2) ID OB : Entering obstetrical data in addition to (1)
(3) ID GYN : Entering gynecological data in addition to (1)
(4) ID BSA : Entering body surface area in addition to (1)
(5) ID URO : Entering urological data in addition to (1)
If you change any of the above items, the selected format will be held until you call the next preset. You can set this
selection using a preset as well.
The data items that were no longer displayed when you changed the format are memorized. When the format is
changed once again to enable the data to be displayed, the previous data is displayed.
OK
Stores the entered information, and closes the ID entry screen.
Cancel
Cancels the entered information, and closes the ID entry screen.
1-4-1-1. Patient Information
Patient ID
Enter the patient ID. When you start up the system or register a new patient and you do not enter the patient ID, the
No ID is automatically entered. So, the No ID is attached to all the images and the measurement data that are stored
at the situations above.
Sex
You can select any one of appropriate from M (Male), F (Female), Other and Blank.
[Remark]
Gender is able to input to every Application in advance with DISP-ID,Comment of Preset.
Date of birth
In case of Direct Input.
A descriptive example of input: A case of Jan. 0l, 2001 is to be input as 2001/01/01
Inputting this column with date, the system counts the age automatically (Rounded down less than a decimal point)
and the age is consequently displayed in Age column.
1-37
MN1-1174 Rev.9
When using the calendar:

Using the trackball, move Arrow mark to the mark indicates Date of Birth and press the SET switch, then a
calendar is displayed.
Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Christian year, and by pressing the SET switch, you can change the year
by year.
Using the trackball, move the arrow to a Month. Pressing the SET switch, you can display the drop-down menu of
the month calendar Jan. through Dec., so that you can select the month you intend to input.
Age
The age is calculated from the current date and the Date of birth, and displayed with all digits to the right of the
decimal point discarded. The unit of the age is “D” for 6 days after birth or younger, “W” for 7 to 29 days after birth,
and “M” for 30 to 364 days after birth, and “Y” for 365 or older.
When the data is directly entered into the Age after the data is entered into the Date of birth, the data of the Date of
birth is erased (blank display).
Height
You can select the unit of the height from the options below.
• Meters
• Centimeters
• Feet/Inches
The units above can be registered in the Preset.
Weight
You can select the unit of the weight from the options below.
• Kilograms
• Pounds/Ounces
The units above can be registered in the Preset.
Occupation
Enter the occupation of a patient.
1-38
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-4-1-2. Study Information
1) Common items for all the ID entry screens
Study ID
The number of times that the same patient was accepted is input.
Accession
The number of examinations performed in one day is input.
Referring Phys/Reporting Phys/Sonographer

Enter the data with the keys. The patient names that are entered with the keys are stored as options in the system.
2) Items varied depending on ID types
BSA (ID BSA)

This item calculates the BSA (Body surface area) according to the selected equation. The unit is m2.
It is also possible to enter the BSA directly from the keyboard.
[Remark]
There are two equations of BSA shown below
a. DuBois
BSA = 0.007184 × H0.725 × W0.425
BSA: m2, H:cm, W: kg
b. Boyd
BSA = 0.0003207 × H0.3 × W (0.7285 -0.0188 × logW)
BSA: m2, H:cm, W: g
1-39
MN1-1174 Rev.9
LMP/BBT/EGA/EDC/GA (ID Obstetrics, ID Gynecology)

This item appears when a patient is female. You can enter the date of the last menstruation period and others.
LMP (Date of the last menstruation period)
GA = (Current date − LMP) ÷ 7
EDC = 280 days + LMP
BBT (Estimated date of ovulation)
GA = (Current date − BBT + 14 days) ÷ 7
EDC = (280 days − 14 day) BBT
EGA (Previous examination date and Gestational age on previous examination date)
GA = (Current date − Previous examination date) ÷ 7 + EGA
EDC = Previous examination date + (280days − EGA)
EDC (Estimated date of confinement)
GA = 280 days − (EDC − Current date) ÷ 7
GA (Gestational age)
EDC = Current date + (280 days − GA × 7)
[Remark]
For the ID Obstetrics, you can select any of the LMP, BBT, EGA, EDC, or GA.
For the ID Gynecology, you can select either of the LMP or BBT.
GRAV/PARA/AB/ECTO (ID Obstetrics, ID Gynecology)

Only the integers (0 to 99) can be entered.
[Remark]
GRAV : Number of gravida
PARA : Number of para
AB : Number of abortions or miscarriages
ECTO : Number of ectopic pregnancies
Serum PSA (ID Urology)

Enter the value of Serum PSA directly from the keyboard. The unit is ng/ml.
This item is displayed when a patient is male.
1-40
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-4-1-3. Series/Image Information

Displays the screen for entering the attributes related to images.
Body part examined

Select the part to be examined from the list.
Laterality
Enter the laterality of a body part to be examined.
Description
Enter the description of a image.
Image type
Select the image type from the list.
Patient orientation
Enter an anatomical orientation of a patient. Enter A (anterior), P (posterior), H (head), F (foot), R (right), or L (left)
for the orientation of a patient used when an image is viewed from the side and when an image is viewed from the
side from above, using a backslash.
Region calibration
Select whether or not to include the measured data of each image into the image data. Select ON or OFF.
Combined calibration
Select whether or not to include the brightness data into the Region calibration. Select ON or OFF.
Full attributes
Select whether or not to include all the data of a image when the image is recorded and transferred. Select ON or
OFF.
Agent
Enter the name of contrast media.
1-41
MN1-1174 Rev.9
Route
Enter the route of contrast media.
Start/Stop time
Enter the start and stop time at which the contrast media is given. You can enter up to 8 characters in the time format.
Volume
Enter the volume of the contrast media that is given.
Total dose
Enter the total dose of the effective components of the media contrast.
1-4-2. How to register a patient

Before starting an inspection, you should enter the patient information and the inspection information.
The patient Name and ID are displayed above the ultrasound image.
(1) Press the New Patient switch to display the ID Entry screen.
→ The cursor appears in the field of the ID in the Patient Information. Now you can enter a patient ID from
the keyboard.
(2) Enter a patient ID and press the Enter key.

→ The cursor is moved to the field of the Name in the Patient Information. Now you can enter a patient
name from the keyboard.
[Remark]
When examining the same patient for the second or subsequent time, simply enter the ID and the previously
registered patient data is automatically displayed.
(3) Enter a patient name.

→ The last name should come first, and then the first name. Enter a space between the last name and the
first name.
(4) Enter a patient name and press the Enter key.

→ Enter the information you know in the same steps above.
(5) Enter the sex by means of the arrow keys, then press Enter.
(6) Once you have entered the patient information, press the OK button or the ID key.
→ The patient and examination data input screen closes. The ultrasound slice image screen re-appears, and
of the entered data the patient's name and patient's ID appear at the top of the screen.
[Remark]
When you click the Cancel button, the changed contents are discarded.
At the end of measurement, the equipment returns to the condition that it was in when the ID function was started.
[Remark]
If you re-write patient data that has been registered once, a message asking you whether or not you wish to renew
the data will appear.
1-42
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-4-3. Search function

This function searches for the patient data that matches the search conditions from the patient database inside the
equipment, and displays the selected patient data on the ID input screen.
Fig. Search screen
Search
Reads the patient information from the patient database in the system according to the search criteria, and displays
the information on the patient list display screen.
OK
Reads the patient information that is selected from the list, and returns the previous screen.
Cancel
Returns to the previous screen.
<How to search>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Search button on the upper left hand corner of the screen, then press
the SET switch.
→ Display the Search screen.
(2) Enter the patient ID or Name you wish to search, and using the trackball, move the arrow to Search button,
then press the SET switch.
→ The Patient IDs and Names that match the search criteria are displayed on the list.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the desired patient information in the search result displayed in the
list, then press the SET switch.
→ The selected information is highlighted in blue.
1-43
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the OK button, then press the SET switch.
→ The screen returns to the ID entry screen and the patient information that was entered in the past is dis-
played.
[Remark]
It is possible to fuzzy search using either/both Patient ID or/and Patient Name as the search criteria.
If you press the Search button without entering the search criteria, all the patient information in the system appears.
1-4-4. Find (Option: SOP-4000-20B is necessary.)

Reads the patient data from the HIS (Hospital Information System) to the equipment, and displays it in the form of
a list.
When you select the Find button on the ID input screen, the Find screen appears.
Fig. Find screen
OK
Reads the patient data for the patient concerned, and re-displays the ID screen.
Cancel
Re-displays the original screen.
Name
Switches the patient display in the list to patient name, and arranges the data in order of patient name.
ID
Switches the patient display in the list to patient ID, and arranges the data in order of patient ID.
1-44
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Operation method>
Find
(1) Press the Find button on the ID screen.

→ The patient data in the HIS is read.
(2) Select the patient's name from the list, and press the OK button.
→ The patient data on the ID screen is input.
(3) When you wish to display the list in the sequence of ID number, select the ID radio button.
Enter the ID number or name to the ID screen, and press the Find button. Data that includes this number or name is
read from the HIS.
Worklist
You can display a list of the patient data stored in the equipment using the following procedure.
(1) Press the Worklist button on the ID screen.

→ Read the patient data from the equipment.
(2) Select the patient's name from the list, and press the OK button.
→ The patient data is input to the ID screen.
(3) If you wish to display a list in the sequence of ID number, select the ID radio button.
[Remark]
If you enter an ID number or name using the ID screen then press the Worklist button, only the data that includes
that number or name is read from the equipment.
1-45
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-4-5. Data Management

This function reads/writes the patient information from/to the external media, and deletes the patient data.
Data Management screen

When the Data Management button is selected on the ID entry screen, the patient data management screen is
displayed. You can operate the functions shown below on the searched patient information.
Fig. Data Management screen
Search
Searches the data from the medium specified in the Target Medium according to the search criteria.
Delete
Deletes the patient information selected in the list.
Read from FD/MO

Reads the patient information that is selected in the list from the external medium into the system.
This function can be operated when the FD or MO is specified in the Target Medium.
Write to FD/MO
Writes the patient information that is selected in the list from the system into the external medium.
This function can be operated when the Built in HD is specified in the Target Medium.
Optimize database
Optimizes the database in the system to reduce the access time to the database.
Close
Closes the Data Management function, and returns to the ID screen.
All
Selects all of the data in the list. Pressing this button once again returns all of the data to a non-selected condition.
1-46
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Operation method>
1) When reading the patient information from the external medium into the system:
(1) Select FD or MO disk in the Target Medium.

→ The File List that is in the selected medium appears.
(2) Select the desired File in the File List, and press the OK button.
→ Enter any of or all of the Patient ID, Patient Name, or/and From Until (Date) of which you wish to read
the patient information into the system, into the search criteria.
(3) Press the SEARCH button.

→ A list of patient data that matches the search conditions is displayed from the selected file.
(4) Select the patient information that you wish to read into the system, and press the Read from FD/MO button.
→ The selected patient information is read into the HD in the system.
2) When storing the patient information from the system into the external medium:
(1) Enter any of or all of the Patient ID, Patient Name, or/and From Until (Date) of which you wish to store the
patient information into the search criteria.
(2) Select the Built in HD in the Target Medium, and press the Search button.
→ The list of the patient information that matches the search criteria is displayed, allowing the Write to
FD/MO button to be operated.
(3) Select the file you wish to store into the external medium, and press the Write to FD/MO button.
→ The dialogue in which you can select a medium and enter a file name appears.
(4) Select a medium, enter a file name, and press the OK button.
→ The selected patient data is stored into the specified medium.
[Remark]
For the situation above, all the data that you selected are stored in one file.
[Remark]
If all of the selected patient information cannot be stored into one medium, the message appears. In this case, you
should select the data to be stored, and repeat the same procedure.
1-47
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3) When deleting the patient information:
(1) Enter any of or all of the Patient ID, Patient Name, or/and From Until (Date) of which you wish to delete the
patient information into the search criteria.
(2) In the Target Medium, select the medium in which the patient information to be deleted is stored.
[Remark]
When you select the floppy disk or MO disk, the File List appears. Select the desired file, and press the OK button.
(3) Press the SEARCH button.

→ A list of patient data that matches the search conditions is displayed from the selected media file.
(4) Select the patient information you wish to delete, and press the Delete button.
→ The selected patient information is deleted.
1-48
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-5.Examination in the B Mode
1-5. Examination in the B Mode

The B mode is used to display an arbitrary cross-section of the body as a slice image.
1-5-1. Basic Operation Procedure
<Single screen display>
(1) Press the B switch to display a B mode image.
(2) Apply the probe to the part of the body to be scanned.

→ B mode image of the part of the body being examined appears on the screen.
(3) Adjust the gain and contrast so as to obtain a satisfactory image.
(4) Once you have obtained a suitable image, press the FREEZE switch to freeze the image.
(5) Perform measurement as necessary.

(6) Record the image as necessary.

→ Set the recorder to be used by means of a preset operation.
<2-screen display>
You can display a B mode image as two images on the left and right of the screen. However, you cannot move both
images simultaneously.
Select the left or right image using the SELECT switch.
In the freeze state of the 2B mode, you can display the respective images one at a time on the screen.
(Request function)
For details, refer to Section 1-3. “Operating the various switches”.
(1) Press the B|B switch.

→ The B mode image is displayed on the left side of the screen. (2B mode screen)
(2) Press the SELECT or B|B switch.

→ The left image freezes, and the right image is displayed in real time.
(3) Once again, press the SELECT or B|B switch.

→ The right image freezes, and the left image is displayed in real time.
(4) To perform a request, press the B switch in the freeze state.
(5) When the freeze state is released, the specified image (the image that is indicated by the “ ” active mark)
is displayed in real time.
[Remark]
On the edge of B-mode image with UST-9124 or ASU-1003, a white line may be displayed, which is not a malfunc-
tion of the system.
1-49
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-5.Examination in the B Mode
<2B MAPPING>
2B MAPPING is a function that enables you to display a frozen B mode image stored in the cine memory as a 2B
mode image on the left and right halves of the screen when 2B MAPPING is set to On using a preset.
By using this function, you can display systolic and diastolic images for the same cardiac cycle on the left and right
sides of the screen, which is convenient for when measuring cardiac functions.
<Operation method>
(1) Display a B image, then press the FREEZE switch.

→ The B image is displayed as a frozen image.
(2) Press the B|B switch.

→ The B mode image is displayed on the left half of the screen, and nothing is displayed on the right half
of the screen. In this state, you can also use the search function.
Using the trackball, select the desired image.
(3) Press the SELECT or B|B switch.

→ The same image appears on both the left and right halves of the screen.
[Remark]
Switch over the active image using the SELECT or B|B switch.
(4) Press the B switch.

→ The 2B MAPPING function is terminated.
The image that corresponded to the active side of the 2B mode display is displayed in the B mode.
[Remark]
When you press the FREEZE switch during 2B MAPPING to cancel the freeze condition, a B real time image is
displayed.
1-50
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-6.B/M and M Modes
1-6. B/M and M Modes

The M mode is a mode in which the ultrasound beam is fixed in a straight line on a B mode image, and the motion
of the body that reflects the ultrasound wave on this straight line is displayed on the screen along with the passage
of time, enabling it to be observed.
The B/M mode is a mode in which a B mode image and an M mode image are displayed simultaneously.
You can observe an M mode image which checking the detection position with the B mode image.
A dotted line is displayed on a B mode image. This dotted line is called a cursor. You can set the cursor in any di-
rection on the B mode image using the trackball on the operation panel. The data that lies along this cursor is dis-
played as an M mode image.
When the image is not frozen, graduation marks are displayed only at the top and bottom edges of the M mode image.
When you freeze the image, the graduation marks are displayed as shown in the figure at right.
1cm
(0.5cm)
0.5sec
The graduation marks are displayed at intervals of 1cm in the depth direction (or 0.5cm when the display depth is
5cm or less), and 0.5 sec in the sweep velocity direction.
1-6-1. Basic operation procedure
<B/M,M mode>
(1) Press the B/M switch.

→ The B mode and M mode images are displayed simultaneously in real time.
(2) While the CURSOR/B.L.S switch is lit orange, roll the trackball left or right.
→ The cursor on the B mode image will move left or right, and the part indicated by the cursor is displayed
as an M mode image.
(3) Adjust the gain and contrast so as to obtain a satisfactory image.
(4) Once you have obtained a satisfactory image, press the FREEZE switch.
→ Both the B and M images freeze.
[Remark]
If you wish to freeze only one of the images, press the SELECT switch. Each time you press this switch, the image
switches in the sequence B freeze → M freeze → B freeze.
1-51
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-6.B/M and M Modes
(5) Once again, press the FREEZE switch.

→ Unfreeze both the B and M mode images.
[Remark]
When only one image is frozen, you can display both images in real time by pressing the B/M switch.
[Remark]
When you wish to make only the M mode image a full screen real time display, press the M switch.
<M-WINDOW function>
This function displays an M mode image in enlarged form.
(1) While the CURSOR/B.L.S switch is lit orange, turn rotary encoder 1.
→ Turning the rotary encoder1 clockwise, reduce the size of the window.
Turning the rotary encoder1 counterclockwise, enlarge the size of the window.
(2) Using the trackball, move the window.

→ An M mode image in the range of the window appears.
(3) Terminate the M-WINDOW function.

→ To terminate this function, either press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch or turn the rotary encoder 1 fully
left.
1-52
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-6.B/M and M Modes
<Free angular M-mode> (The optional SOP-4000-11B is necessary.)

This function is for creating an M mode image from the information obtained from the M mode cursor that has been
drawn optionally over a B mode image. You can create an M mode image even on a B mode image saved by the
Cine memory.
Note
Operate on a monochrome image.
(1) Display a suitable B mode image.
(2) Press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch twice, or turn the FAM Mode in the menu to ON.
→ A solid line cursor for a free angular M-mode is displayed cen-
trally on the B mode image.
(3) Moving the free angular M-mode cursor with the trackball from side
to side or up and down, you can turn the cursor with the rotary en-
coder 1.
The size of the free angular M-mode cursor is adjustable with the
Cursor Size on the menu.
(4) After adjusting the free angular M-mode cursor, press the B/M
switch.
→ On the B/M mode image, the M mode image on the free angular
M-mode cursor is displayed.
(5) Once you have obtained a satisfactory image, press the FREEZE
switch.
[Remark]
In searching for an M mode image, use the trackball and for the B mode im-
age, use the rotary encoder 1.
[Remark]
A zooming created in the M mode can be changed by the Magnification (FAM) on the menu.
(6) Once again, press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch.

→ The optional M mode is finished.
[Remark]
When disposing an image saved by the cine memory, operate it as shown in (2) through (4).
After completing creation of the M mode image, operator's requests for the image become possible.
1-53
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-6.B/M and M Modes
<Simultaneous display of plural free angular M-mode cursors>

This function is for creating multiple Mode images, displaying multiple M mode cursors on optional locations of a
B mode image. You can create an image even on a B mode image taken in by the Cine memory.
[Remark]
Before starting an operation, specify the number of M cursors in the Multi FAM on the menu.
The maximum number of M cursor displayed is three.
Note
<Example: When displaying three M cursors>

→ The No.1 cursor (A) is displayed.
(3) Move the free angular M-mode cursor with the track ball from side to side or up and down, and turn the cursor
with the rotary encoder 1.
The size of the free angular M-mode cursor is adjustable with the Cursor Size on the menu.

→ The No. 2 cursor (B) is displayed.
Furthermore, by pressing the MARK REF switch, the third cursor
(C) is displayed.
A
B C
(5) On the state all the cursors are displayed, press the MARK REF
switch.
→ By pressing the MARK REF switch every time, you can change
the active state of cursor in the sequence of A→ B→ C→ A.
[Remark]
The active state of cursor is deleted by selecting the Active FAM Off on the menu.
[Remark]
The solid line of M mode cursor expresses a display range of M mode image.

→ By the number of displayed M mode cursors, M mode images
A
are displayed up and down separately.
[Remark] A
B C
When disposing an image acquired by the cine memory, operate it as B
shown in (2) through (6).

C
1-54
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-6.B/M and M Modes
<Cursor display for a free angular M-mode minor axis cross-section image>
In order to display on M mode of left ventricle minor axis simply and easy, you can display three cursors (or two
cursors) simultaneously, and able to display a free angular M-mode image.
Note
(1) Display a suitable B mode image of left ventricular short-axis.
→ A free angular M-mode cursor is displayed on the screen.
(3) Turn the PSAX on the menu to ON.

→ Three optional M mode cursors segmenting with 60 degree
angle centrally are displayed on the screen.
(4) Move the three cursors simultaneously over the left ventricle im-
A B
age with the trackball.
C
(5) The size of free angular M-mode cursor is adjustable with the
Cursor Size on the menu.
(6) Turn the cursor with the rotary encoder 1.

→ M mode divided into three parts horizontally is displayed.
A
[Remark]
To change the number of cursors to two (90°), turn the Multi FAM on
the menu to 2. B
A B
[Remark] C
When disposing an image saved by the cine memory, operate it as C
shown in (2) through (7).
1-55
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-7.B/D and D Modes
1-7. B/D and D Modes

The D mode displays the data of the blood flow and the cardiac muscle tissues in the heart and the blood vessels.
The blood flow information displayed in this mode is called a D mode image. A D mode image is not an image of
a part of the body, but is a graph of blood flow information. For this reason, it is also called a Doppler pattern.
The B/D mode is a mode in which a B mode image and a D mode image are displayed simultaneously. It enables
you to observe blood flow information on a D mode image while checking the B mode image to see what part of the
body the detected blood flow information belongs to.
The following two kinds of ultrasound beams are used to display a D mode image.
(1) PW Doppler: The ultrasound beam is emitted as discrete pulses, and a D mode image displayed.
You can obtain blood flow information concerning any point on a B mode image.
(2) CW Doppler: The ultrasound beam is emitted continuously, and a D mode image displayed.
CW Doppler is suitable for obtaining high speed flow data for evaluating the severity of mitral
stenosis, aortic stenosis, regurgitation, and so on.
[Remark]
It is necessary to prepare the optional ST-CW Doppler unit(UCW-4000) for the performing the CW Doppler.
1-56
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-7.B/D and D Modes
<B/D mode>
(1) Press the B/D switch.

→ The B mode image and D mode image are displayed according to the Triplex Mode setting of the preset.
(Refer to the following.)
Triplex
When the mode changes from the B mode to the B/D mode, both of the B mode and D mode images are displayed
in real time.
B D
Real time Real time Real time
B-Real
When the mode changes from the B mode to the B/D mode, the B mode image is displayed in real time, and the D
mode image is blank.
B D B D
Real time Real time Blank Real time Real time
D-Real
When a B mode image in a PW Sound On condition changes to the B/D mode, the B mode image freezes, and the
D mode image is displayed in real time. If PW Sound On is not in use, the same operation as for the case of B-Real
takes place.
B D B D
Real time Freeze Real time Real time Real time
PW sound On
1-57
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-7.B/D and D Modes
[Remark]
If you press the SELECT switch while both B and D mode images are displayed in real time, the B image freezes,
and the D mode image is displayed in real time. If you then press the SELECT switch again, the images displayed
in real time switch over. If you press the B/D switch when only one image is displayed in real time, both images will
be displayed in real time.
SELECT
Real time Real time

B D
B D
Freeze Real time
SELECT
Real time Freeze
SELECT
(2) While the CURSOR/B.L.S switch is lit orange, set the velocity detection position using the trackball.
→ The sample volume on the B mode image moves, and the velocity on the sample volume is displayed on
the D mode image.
Set the size of the sample volume with the SAMPLE VOLUME switch according to the particular pur-
pose.
(3) Press the VEL RANGE switch.

→ Adjust the velocity range.
(4) When the incident angle of the ultrasonic wave is not parallel to the blood vessel, press the ANGLE switch
and turn rotary encoder 3 to correct the angle.
(5) Press the M/D GAIN knob or the CONTRAST switch, and adjust the D mode image.
[Remark]
You can move the baseline by using the CURSOR/B.L.S switch and rotary encoder 1.
(6) Once you have displayed a satisfactory image, press the FREEZE switch.
→ Both the B mode and D mode images freeze.
[Remark]
When you wish to freeze only one of these images, press the SELECT switch.
Each time you press this switch, the image that freezes switches over in the sequence B freeze→ D freeze→ B freeze,
and so on.
[Remark]
When you wish to display only the D mode image in real time over the entire screen, press the D switch.
1-58
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-8.Flow Display
1-8. Flow Display

This function displays data concerning flow inside blood vessels and also the velocity of the cardiac muscle tissue
by displaying color on a B mode image.
Like other Doppler modes, Doppler information is obtained from the change in the approaching and receding blood
flow.
<Flow display/power flow display>
(2) Press the FLOW switch.

→ The blood flow data is displayed in color on the B mode image. The flow component that approaches
the probe is displayed in red, and the component that moves away from the probe is displayed in blue.
[Remark]
Red and blue may be reversed depending upon the set conditions such as Color Polarity.
(3) Set the SCAN AREA switch so that it lights orange.

→ You can move the flow area using the trackball.

→ The border of the flow area is indicated by solid lines. You can enlarge or reduce the enclosed area by
using the trackball.
It expands in the vertical direction
Upper rotation
It reduces in the Track It expands in the

transverse direction ball transverse direction
Left rotation Right rotation
Lower rotation
It reduces in the vertical direction
[Remark]
If you turn rotary encoder 1 while the SCAN AREA switch is lit orange, the black and white area is enlarged or
reduced in the horizontal direction.
[Remark]
The width of the flow area is always displayed smaller than the width of the black and white area. If you performed
an operation that results in the width of the flow area becoming greater, the area being changed has priority, and the
size of the black and white area is automatically adjusted.
1-59
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-8.Flow Display

→ The flow area boundary is displayed as a dotted line, and the flow area shift function is re-activated.
(6) Rotate the FLOW GAIN knob so as to adjust the flow sensitivity.
(7) Press the VEL RANGE switch so as to adjust the flow velocity range.
[Remark]
The size of the flow area may sometimes change.
<Monochrome/Color real-time images simultaneous display>

This function can display a color (power flow) real-time image and a monochrome real-time image on the right and
left side of the screen at the same time.
(1) Press the B switch to display the B mode image.

→ The color real-time image is displayed on the B mode image.
When you press the POWER FLOW switch, the power flow is displayed.
(3) Press the DDD switch.

→ The B mode image on the left side of the screen is displayed in monochrome, and the B mode image on
the right side is displayed in color (power flow).
Both images are displayed as the real-time image, and they show the same image.
(4) Press the DDD switch or another mode switch.

→ The Monochrome/Color real-time images simultaneous display is closed.
1-60
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-9.Power Flow display
1-9. Power Flow display

This function colors the image according to the intensity (area) of the Doppler signals.
This function has the sensitivity about slow blood flows.
1-9-1. Basic operation
<Power flow display>
(2) Press the POWER FLOW switch.
(3) Pressing the VEL RANGE switch, adjust the flow velocity range.
[Remark]
The size of the flow area sometimes changes.
1-10. Tissue Doppler Imaging display (Option : SOP-4000-9B is necessary.)

The Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI) display is intended to make visible the motion of the cardiac muscle tissue, and
so on. It thus differs from the target Doppler display which is intended to show normal blood flow.
<TDI display>
(1) Set TDI from Display Mode, TDI in the Preset, and perform the selected Preset.

→ The data concerning the moving tissue (TDI) is displayed in color.
(4) Put the flow area in the optimum condition.

→ Press the SCAN AREA switch, then using the trackball and the MARK REF switch enlarge, reduce and/
or move the flow area.
(5) Adjust the sensitivity.

→ Using FLOW GAIN knob, adjust the flow sensitivity.
(6) Pressing the VEL RANGE switch, change the flow velocity range.
[Remark]
When you change VEL RANGE, the size of the flow area may sometimes change slightly.
1-61
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-11.Brachytherapy Guide Lines
1-11. Brachytherapy Guide Lines

When the UST-672-5/7.5 trans rectum probe is connected, brachytherapy guide lines are displayed.
[Remark]
When the UST-672-5/7.5 is connected and the system is in the B mode, a grid is displayed on the convex display.
A grid is not displayed in the 2B mode. Also, it is not displayed in the Wide format, even in the B mode. Change the
1B Format of Display 1to Normal.
[Remark]
When performing brachytherapy, it is necessary to use a guide and a template.

Before starting measurement, carry out the following settings.
• Add Brachytherapy to the B mode menu using the Menu setting of the preset.
• Change 1B Format to Normal using Display 1 of the preset.
<Grid display>
(1) Press the MENU switch, and select Brachytherapy.

→ The Brachytherapy menu appears.
1-62
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(2) Set Mode to Grid.

→ A 13 × 13 grid-shaped graphic display, a list of memorized positions, and a coordinate mark appear on
the screen.
List of memorized
positions
Coordinate
position mark
[Remark]
There are three types of coordinate display methods in the grid display. Set the desired method using Grid Display
Type in the Display 5 preset, or the menu.
Type A:
The horizontal axes of the coordinates are expressed as A, B, C, — K, L, M, and vertical axes as 0, 1, 2, 3, — 10,
11, 12.
TypeB:
The horizontal axes of the coordinates are expressed as A, a, B, b, C, c, — e, F, f, G, and the vertical axes as 1, 1.5,
2, 2.5, — 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7. The coordinate scales are displayed using bold characters and integral values only.
TypeC:
The horizontal axes of the coordinates are expressed as A, a, B, b, C, c — e, F, f, G, and the vertical axes as 1, 1.5.
2. 2.5 — 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7.
Type A Type B Type C

[Remark]
You can move the list of memorized positions by starting Table Location in the menu, then using the trackball and
the SET switch.
1-63
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Move the coordinate position mark with the trackball, then press the SET switch at the locations that you
wish to memorize, in the puncture sequence.
→ The coordinate numbers are registered in sequence in the memorized position list at the right side of the
screen.
[Remark]
You can memorize up to 30 points. If you attempt to register coordinate numbers at more than 30 points, the message
“Memory Full” will appear at bottom left of the screen.
[Remark]
When registering coordinate numbers, you can vary the number part of the coordinates by turning rotary encoder 1.
(4) If there are coordinates that are to be added to the registered coordinates, move the coordinate position mark
to the coordinates to be added, select Add using rotary encoder 2, and press the menu select switch.
→ The first position in the memorized position list is highlighted.
(5) Using the trackball, move the highlight display to the position that you wish to add, and press the SET switch.
→ A new coordinate position is registered in the item at the top of the highlight display.
(6) If there are registered coordinates that you wish to delete, select Delete using rotary encoder 2, and press the
menu select switch.
→ The first position in the memorized position list is displayed.
(7) Using the trackball, move the highlight display to the position that you wish to delete, and press the SET
switch.
→ A message appears on the screen.
(8) To delete the position, select OK. If you do not wish to delete the position, select Cancel.
[Remark]
The memorized coordinates, and so on, are held until the power is switch Off or the NEW PATIENT switch is
pressed.
[Remark]
You can use the grid display even after changing the display depth on the screen. If the grid graphic display protrudes
from the display range, the grid and characters will be displayed inside the display range. This also applies in the
case of a zoom display.
1-64
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Target display>
(1) Register the coordinate position in advance, and change Mode to Target.
→ The first coordinate number registered in the memorized position list is highlighted, and the coordinate
position mark moves to the corresponding position.
[Remark]
Unless you register the coordinates you cannot select Target.

→ Move the highlight display in the memorized position list to the next coordinate number. The coordinate
position mark also moves to the corresponding position. Subsequently, each time you press the MARK
REF switch, the coordinate position mark moves in the registered sequence.
[Remark]
You cannot move the coordinate position mark using the trackball.
1-65
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-12.Contrast Harmonic Echo (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)
1-12. Contrast Harmonic Echo (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)

This function enables the operator to obtain a grasp of the blood circulation in the abdominal region when using a
contrast agent to simulate the composition of the blood corpuscles.
When ultrasonic waves strike a contrast agent, the contrast agent emits weak harmonics, enabling the perfusion
image of the tissue to be confirmed. This equipment has been adjusted so that the contrast agent is broken up by the
high sound pressure, resulting in a more powerful signal that enables a perfusion image of the tissue to be seen.
When the contrast agent is to be broken up by the high pressure to enable the blood circulation to be seen, it is not
possible to display the contrast agent in real-time. Note that when the contrast agent is continuously broken up in
real-time, the contrast effect is lost after a short period.
To sustain the contrast effect for a long period, use the Intermittent Trigger Mode in which ultrasonic waves are
transmitted and received at fixed intervals and the contrast agent is retained during the rest periods.
In the case of the Contrast Harmonic Echo Mode, it is necessary to adjustment the following functions to suit each
patient.
Acoustic Power : Set so that the MI value displayed on the screen is maximum.
Focus : Adjust the focus mark displayed on the screen to the desired observation position.
INTERIM Interval : The real-time performance falls, but the contrast effect is improved.
The Contrast Harmonic Echo Mode is used together with the gray scale display (B mode) and the Power Flow mode
to observe the blood circulation condition.
The types of probes that can be used with the Contrast Harmonic Echo Mode are restricted. (If you use a probe that
cannot be used with this mode, you will be unable to use this function.)
1-66
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-12.Contrast Harmonic Echo (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)

Before commencing an examination, assign the functions for Contrast Harmonic Echo to a menu using a preset.
(1) Turn On Contrast Harmonic Echo in the menu.

→ Second harmonic waves will be received and an image will be displayed.
[Remark]
To view an image using PowerFlow, turn On Contrast Harmonic Echo and POWER.
(2) Adjust Focus and Acoustic Power so as to display a satisfactory B mode image.
[Remark]
For details of the menu that appears, refer to "5-3-10. Contrast Harmonic Echo Menu (Option: CHM-4000 is neces-
sary)".
[Remark]
Perform adjustment so that the MI value becomes a maximum. The MI value varies when you change focus.
Use the IMAGE/FREQ switch to adjust the frequency according to the depth beneath the skin to which you wish to
examine the patient. When making an observation over a short distance, select a high frequency (e.g. 2.1 H); when
high sensitivity is necessary, select a low frequency (e.g. 1.9 P). You can make a maximum of four settings.
(3) Administer the contrast agent, and turn On Timer in the menu.
→ The timer appears on the screen, and starts counting.
(4) Press Intermittent Trigger Mode in the menu.

→ Intermittent transmission takes place according to the conditions set by INTERM Interval and INTERM
Frame in the menu.
[Remark]
When you turn On the 2B Display, a 2B display appears. The first image is displayed on the right side of the screen
at the timing of each trigger, and the second and subsequent images are displayed on the left.
(5) Upon completion of the examination, press the FREEZE switch.

→ The images freeze. Display the target image using a search operation, and store it using the STORE
switch.
[Remark]
The contrast effect ends after several minutes. When using the Late Phase method in which the contrast image is
checked after the contrast agent has adequately permeated the tissue, wait until the contrast effect has ended, then
interrupt the examination administer the contrast agent again, and after the contrast agent has adequately permeated
the tissue carry out an examination once again.
1-67
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13.Real time 3D mode (Option: EU-9112 is required)
1-13. Real time 3D mode (Option: EU-9112 is required)

The real-time 3D mode has the six functions described in 1) to 6) below. These functions enable you to display an
ultrasonic slice image as a 3D image at high speed.
1) This function acquires volume data using a dedicated 3D scanner, and displays it in real-time as a 3D image
and three orthogonally cross-sectional images.
2) This function sets the display format for one 3D image and three orthogonally cross-sectional images to a sin-
gle enlarged image (1View display), a display consisting of a combination of the 3D image and a single cross-
section (2Views display) or the entire display consisting of a combination of the 3D image and the three or-
thogonally cross-sectional images (4Views display).
3) This function rotates or shifts the volume data of a 3D image to enable the image to be observed from an arbi-
trary direction. It also enables the zoom or rendering mode (drawing algorithm) to be selected, and image qual-
ity adjustment and other operations to be performed.
4) This function rotates or shifts cross-sectional images, enabling any three orthogonally cross-sectional images
to be displayed, and also permits the images to be zoomed and the image quality to be adjusted.
5) This function enables unnecessary artifacts displayed on a 3D image or three orthogonally cross-sectional im-
ages to be deleted by a Erase Tool while the images are frozen.
6) This function permits observation of the face or other part of a fetus when the volume data is rotated with re-
spect to a frozen 3D image using the animation loop playback function.
1-68
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-1. Real time 3D display screen

In a real-time 3D display, the positions of the view point and cross-sectional position are spatially fixed as shown in
the left figures below. A 3D image is displayed as an image seen from the direction of the view point. Consequently,
in order to display the 3D image seen from an arbitrary cross-section or arbitrary direction, it is necessary to parallel-
shift or rotate the volume data to an arbitrary position as shown in (1) to (3).
To perform a parallel shift in the real-time 3D mode, press the 3D View Control (SCAN AREA) switch, and then
operate the trackball. You can change the position where the cross-sections intersect orthogonally by using this func-
tion to move the region of interest (cone) from the center.
You can perform this operation on both real-time and frozen images.
1) Example : Display of an object which is on a base position
Front view section Side view section

Viewpoint Front view section
Viewpoint direction
of Side view
Top view section
Top View section 3D image
Side view section
2) Example : Display when an object was moved to the right
Front view section Side view section

Viewpoint Front view section
Viewpoint direction
of Side view
Top view section
Side view section
1-69
MN1-1174 Rev.9
When you wish to rotate the region of interest (cone), operate M/D GAIN to rotate the X-axis, or FLOW GAIN to
rotate the Y-axis. Also, if you press the 3D View Control (SCAN AREA) switch, you can rotate the Z-axis using
rotary encoder 1. To select the image to be rotated, select RefA, RefB, RefC or 3D from the menu.
By rotating the image about the center of the screen using rotary encoder 1, you can align the region of interest with
the position in the direction of the visual point, even if the region of interest is in the oblique direction, thus enabling
a 3D image to be displayed more easily.
You can perform this operation on both real-time and frozen images.
(1) Example : Display when a subject is turned
Viewpoint Front view section Side view section

Front view section
Viewpoint direction
of Side view Top view
section
Side view section
If you rotate the region of interest using the X-axis rotation, Y-axis rotation or Z-axis rotation function, the volume
data will also rotate in the direction shown in the figure below.
(2) X-axis turn
Fig. X-axis turn
1-70
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Y-axis turn
Fig. Y-axis turn
(4) Z-axis turn
Fig. Z-axis turn
1-71
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-1-1. Meaning of terms
Rendering : Graphic technology for expressing not only the surface of matter but also its internal state
is called volume rendering. In this instruction manual, volume rendering is abbreviated to
rendering.
Ray : In volume rendering, many view lines are drawn inside the volume data, and the data on
these view lines is arithmetically computed. Each of these view lines is called a ray.
RefA, RefB, RefC : Normally, a B mode image is displayed as a 2-dimensional cross-section. However, be-
cause of the rotation function, the cross-section of the B mode image does not necessarily
indicate a constant direction in the real-time 3D mode. With this equipment, the following
image directions are displayed in advance, and as the initial state the image cross-section
corresponding to electronic scanning is displayed as RefA, the image cross-section corre-
sponding to mechanical scanning as RefB, and the image cross-section in the direction of
the view point as RefC. Also, the description in the main text includes cases in which these
cross-sections are indicated by three orthogonally cross-sections.
A 3D image is an image seen from the view point direction.
Fig. Three orthogonally cross-sectional image
3D ROI, Clipping Box : When you wish to acquire a 3D image of a fetus, set the necessary image range alone and
acquire a 3D image. For an image in the B mode, use the 3D ROI function and specify the
minimum range for performing 3D computation. Images outside this specified range are
not acquired as volume data, so the real-time performance is improved. Clipping Box ad-
ditionally removes unnecessary parts of an image from the range of the volume data.
Adjust the volume data in the box displayed on RefA, RefB and RefC, and in addition
change and adjust the size of the box using the trackball.
1-72
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-2. Real time 3D display screen
(8) (5)
(7) (3)
(2) (6)
(4) (1)
(1) 3D image display area : Displays a 3D image. The image seen from the view point direction is
displayed as a 3D image.
(2) Cross-sectional display area(Ref A) : It displays a cross-section being viewed from the electronic scanning
side.
(3) Cross-sectional display area(Ref B) : It displays a cross-section being viewed from the mechanical
scanning side.
(4) Cross-sectional display area(Ref C) : Displays a cross-section seen from the direction perpendicular to the
transducer.
(5) View point mark : The camera graphic indicates the view point.
The 3D image is the cross-sectional image observed from the direction of
the view point mark.
(6) Cross-sectional position line : Display the orthogonally cross-section position. The color of the line cor-
responds to the color of the border of each cross-sectional image.
(7) Clipping Box : Indicates the position of the Clipping Box. Only the data inside the rectan-
gular parallelepiped is used for the 3D image.
(8) View Control Indicator : Displays the object function when the trackball is operated to shift the
image or enlarge or reduce the Clipping Box.
1-73
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-2-1. Transition of real-time 3D image
3DMode
(3D)
(4B)
(3D) M
(4B)
The above figure shows the state transition in the real-time 3D mode.
There are three display formats, 1View, 2Views and 4Views. To select the desired format, press the B, B/B or M
switch on the panel.
1-74
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-3. Switches to be used and menu

The layout of the RT3D menu can be freely set by a preset. For details of the assignment method, and so on, refer
to Section 6. “PRESET”.
(18) (17) (16) (15)

EXT PRESET ANGLE PROBE
PATIENT RATE POWER SPEED SELECT SELECT
STC
Break
0
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Back
MENU 1
1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Space
2
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | 3
(12)
Tab
[ ]
5
Caps A S D F G H J K L : " 8
Lock ; '
Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? Shift

12
(20)
14
, . / PgUp

(cm)
(14)
Home PgDn End
D.D.D. ACQUIRE
(22)
CURSOR BODY SCAN INVERT HARMONIC
SEARCH USER 1 FOCUS ZOOM ECHO
/B.L.S MARK AREA
(21)
(2)
(23) STORE CLEAR

MEASURE
B M D PW
CW (1)
MENT
FLOW GAIN
B B B M B D FLOW
SELECT
(19)
(13) (4)
MARK REF
REC
B GAIN
(7) (6) (24) (11) (10) (8) (9) (3) (5)
Fig. Control panel(example)
1-13-3-1. Switches to be used
(1) RT 3D :
Turn On the real-time 3D mode to enable a 3D image to be displayed. The real-time 3D mode display format
has the 1View display, 2Views display and 4Views display. You can change the display format by using a
preset.
(2) 1View :
Changes the display layout to 1 View display format.
(3) 2Views :
Changes the display layout to 2Views display format (1 cross-section + 3D image).
1-75
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(4) 4Views :
Changes the display layout to 4Views display format (three orthogonally cross-sections + 3D image).
(5) SELECT :
In the real-time 3D mode, this switch performs active selection of the display layout or selects the object im-
age.
(6) Zoom (3D) :

Enables a real-time 3D mode image to be enlarged or reduced.
The position and size of the 3D image and all three orthogonally cross-sectional images are displayed in uni-
son.
(7) 3D View Control :

When an active image is parallel-shifted using the trackball and rotary encoder 1, a Z-axis rotation takes
place.
Trackball
Sets a rectangular parallelepiped area, and uses internal data alone for rendering a 3D image. Used to remove
unnecessary data from a 3D image. By pressing the MARK REF switch, you can perform range setting (roll-
ing the trackball upward expands the vertical line, rolling it downward contracts the vertical line, rolling it
clockwise expands the horizontal line, and rolling it counterclockwise contracts the horizontal line).
Rotary encoder1
Performs a Z-axis rotation with respect to an active image.
(8) <Freeze On>

Brightness (3D) : This function sets the display brightness of a 3D image.
<Freeze Off>
B GAIN : This function adjusts the sensitivity of the B mode image.
(9) X Axis Rotation :

Rotates an active image with respect to the X-axis direction. The 3D image and all three orthogonally cross-
sectional images rotate in unison.
(10) Y Axis Rotation :

Rotates an active image with respect to the Y-axis direction. The 3D image and all three orthogonally cross-
(11) Z Axis Rotation :

Rotates an active image with respect to the Z-axis direction. The 3D image and all three orthogonally cross-
(12) Opacity Control :

This function enables you to make a selection from 16 preset opacity settings.
Pressing this switch upward causes the numerical value to increase, and vice-versa. You can freely set and
store an opacity value in a preset.
1-76
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(13) Store :
You can store a 3D image by pressing the STORE switch while the image is displayed in real-time.
[Remark]
The Store function operates only when the 3D image is frozen. The 3D image cannot be stored when the Freeze is
OFF.
(14) Volume Acquire :

Acquires and freezes one volume.
(15) Image Parameter :

Calls six parameters set in a preset.
(16) Smoothing (3D) :

Smooths line data in order to reduce noise on a real-time 3D image.
(17) Scan Angle (3D) :

Sets the scanning angle in the case of a real-time 3D image.
(18) Orientation (3D) :

This function changes over the display orientation of a 3D image.
(19) Reset (3D) :

Returns the display to the initial state.
(20) Loop (3D) :

Plays back a 3D image in the specified playback range using an animation display.
(21) Erase Tool :

This function enables you to use a trace on a 3D image to surround an unnecessary part of the image with the
trackball and erase the surrounded area.
(22) Erase Area Reset :

This function returns the display to the image area that was displayed prior to being deleted using Erase Tool.
(23) SEARCH :
Displays 3D images stored in the cine memory.
Use the trackball to search for the image that you wish to display.
(24) 3D ROI :
Operates only when a B mode image is displayed. Using the fan-shaped ROI, specify the range of data to be
displayed as a 3D image and also acquired to a file.
When the ROI is a dotted line, you can move it with the trackball. By pressing the MARK REF switch, the
ROI becomes a solid line, enabling you to change its size.
1-77
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-4-1. Setting an acquisition range in Real time 3D
(1) Display a B mode image and adjust it.

→ You can perform an examination by employing normal convex scanning with a probe.
(2) Press the 3D ROI ( ).

→ A fan-shaped ROI appears on the B mode image, and mechanical scanning stops.
The volume data inside the fan-shaped ROI alone is acquired, so determine the location of the scanner
so that the image to be observed falls inside the ROI, and adjust the position and size of the ROI.
[Remark]
When the ROI is a dotted line, you can adjust its position. When it is a solid line, you can adjust its size.
Press the MARK REF switch to change over the dotted line and solid line.
1-78
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Press the Scan Angle (3D) (ANGLE) switch.

→ The angle of Scan Angle (3D) appears at bottom right of the image. While observing this angle display,
set the acquisition range on the mechanical scanning side. Here, the mechanical scan is stopped, but the
acquisition range is reflected in the real-time 3D mode when you activate this mode. It is recommended
that you set Scan Angle (3D) to the same ratio as that of the range of the 3D ROI as far as possible.
Mechanical scan
Electronic scan
[Remark]
With Image Parameter, the acquisition range on the electronic scanning side and the mechanical scanning side spec-
ified in advance is set in a preset.
1-79
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-4-2. Displaying 3D image with Real time 3D mode
(1) Press the RT 3D (PW/CW) switch.

→ A real-time 3D mode image is displayed.
The following operation procedure is described based on the assumption that the display format is set to
2Views.
(2) Press the 3D View Control (SCAN AREA) switch, and adjust the region of interest so that it coincides with
the center of the Clipping Box.
→ You can move a RefA image with the trackball. Using the trackball, move the region of interest so that
it coincides with the center of the Clipping Box.
→ You can rotate a RefA image about the Z-axis with rotary encoder 1. If there is an unnecessary echo in
the oblique direction on the placenta, for example, use this function to rotate the entire volume data so
that the unnecessary echo is directly below the view point direction.
[Remark]
To adjust the range of the Clipping Box, carry out the following operation.
• To change the range over which 3D computation is to be performed, press the MARK REF switch and reduce the
range in the vertical and horizontal direction of the Clipping Box.
• If the Clipping Box is small, part of a 3D image may drop out. In such a case, increase the range of the Clipping
Box in the vertical and horizontal directions.
• When you change the Clipping Box, the region of interest sometimes deviates from the range of the Clipping Box.
In such a case, press the MARK REF switch once again then move the region of interest using the trackball so
that it coincides with the center of the Clipping Box.
1-80
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-4-3. Changing over the display format of Real time 3D mode
(1) To change the display to the 4Views display, press the 4Views (M) switch.
→ The display format changes over to the 4Views display. The color of the border line on the image indi-
cates the position corresponding to a particular cross-section when a 3D image and other orthogonally
cross-sectional images are displayed.
(2) To change over to a 1View display, press the 1View (B) switch.
→ The display format changes over to the 1View display. By pressing the SELECT switch, you can change
over to each cross-sectional image. The border line on the image indicates the position of the orthogo-
nally cross-sections in color.
[Remark]
After freezing an image, you can change over to a display format (1View, 2Views or 4Views).
1-81
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-4-4. Adjusting 3 perpendicular sections and a 3D image
(1) Select the Rendering Mode of the RENDER Mode on the menu.
→ Select the rendering mode of a 3D image from Shaded, Brightest, X-ray and Lighted.
Fig. Shaded Fig. Brightest Fig. Xray Fig. Lighted
(2) Adjust enlargement / reduce with the Zoom(3D)(ZOOM).

→ To enlarge the size of the three orthogonally cross-sections and the 3D image, press the Zoom (3D)
(ZOOM) switch and turn rotary encoder 1 in the clockwise direction. To return the enlarged images to
their original size, either turn rotary encoder 1 counterclockwise or press the Reset (3D)(D) switch.
(3) Adjust the Opacity Control.

→ Adjust the Opacity Control to display a 3D image showing the skeleton without the skin, or when low
intensity noise is displayed instead of the skin.
(4) Adjust the Brightness of the 3D image.

→ Using Brightness (3D)(B GAIN), adjust the brightness of the 3D image.
1-82
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(5) Rotate the three orthogonally cross-sections and the 3D image in order to adjust their positions.
→ To rotate the region of interest, rotate the X-axis using X Axis Rotation (M/D GAIN) or the Y-axis using
Y Axis Rotation (FLOW GAIN), or press the 3D View Control (SCAN AREA) switch and rotate the Z-
axis using rotary encoder 1. To select the image to be rotated, change over the image using RefA, RefB,
REfC or 3D in the menu. Note that the positional relationship of the images to be rotated is reflected in
both the 3D image and the orthogonally cross-sectional images.
(6) Reset the position of the 3D image.

→ If the region of interest deviates from the volume data, or if the region to be observed disappears from
the screen, press the Reset (3D)(D) switch to restore the position of the volume data.
→ If you cannot obtain a grasp of the positional relationship despite pressing the Reset (3D) (D) switch,
press the RT3D (PW/CW) switch to enter the B mode. The image is checked once again and then the
real-time 3D mode is activated.
1-13-4-5. Saving a volume data to a file
(1) When the satisfactory three orthogonally cross-sectional images and the 3D images are displayed, press the
FREEZE switch.
→ The images are frozen.

→ The displayed image is stored in the image format (DICOM, BMP, etc.) and the storage medium (HDD,
MO, etc.) set in advance using the STORE switch.
1-83
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-5. Applied functional operation procedure
1-13-5-1. Displaying a high-resolution 3D image
(1) Select Detail Scan from the menu while a 3D image is displayed in the real-time 3D mode.
→ Display a partial high quality image of the face of a fetus, for example. A limit is imposed on the display
range, but multiple setting values including the scanning line density are maintained in real time, result-
ing in a higher quality image.
(2) To restore the image to the normal visual field, select Detail Scan from the menu once again.
→ The image returns to the display condition that it was in prior to Detail Scan (including magnification,
position, and LineDensity).
[Remark]
When Detail Scan is ON, you can not select Image Parameter 1 to 6.
1-13-5-2. Erasing unnecessary echoes of a 3D image
(1) When you obtain three satisfactory orthogonally cross-sectional images and a 3D image, press the FREEZE
switch.
→ The image freezes in the real-time 3D mode.
(2) Select the Erase Tool.

→ Using the trackball, move the arrow to the three orthogonally cross-sectional images or the 3D image.

Using the trackball, move the arrow to the starting point, and press the MARK REF switch.
(4) Using the trackball, enclose the unnecessary part and press the MARK REF switch.
→ Using the trace function, enclose the unnecessary part, and after tracing to the end point press the MARK
REF switch once again. The trace line joins the starting point to the end point, and the range is specified.
Selection area inside is deleted Selection area outside is deleted
(5) Select whether the part to be deleted is inside or outside the area enclosed by the line, and press the MARK
REF switch.
→ Using the trackball, move the arrow to the area enclosed by the trace line. The enclosed area becomes
colored, and when the arrow moves outside the area the part outside the area becomes colored. If you
press the MARK REF switch in one of these states, the 3D image data inside or outside the area is
deleted.
1-84
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-13-5-3. Displaying Moving Image Loop playback of 3D image
(1) When you obtain three satisfactory orthogonally cross-sectional images and a 3D image, press the FREEZE
switch.
→ The image freezes in the real-time 3D mode.
(2) Adjust each set function.

→ Specify the direction of loop playback as one-way or round-trip, and also specify playback in the X-axis
direction or playback in the Y-axis direction, then specify the playback angle and playback range of the
volume data.
(3) Press the Loop (3D) (D.D.D) switch.

→ The volume data starts to rotate in order to acquire the loop playback image. At the point where rotation
to the set range ends, animation loop playback starts automatically. You can stop playback by press the
Loop (3D) (D.D.D) switch once again.
(4) Adjust the Loop Speed of the menu.

→ Adjust the speed when playing back a 3D image in the playback range set by Loop (3D) as an animated
display. You can change the playback speed setting even during playback.
1-85
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1-14.Actions to be taken when a defect is detected
1-14. Actions to be taken when a defect is detected
1-14-1. Ensuring patient safety

While using the system, monitor both the system and the patient to ensure that there is no abnormality.
If an abnormality occurs while the system is being used, immediately take the probe away from the patient and
switch off the system.
If an abnormality occurs in the patient, carry out appropriate medical treatment.
1-14-2. Handling the instrument

If a problem occurs in the system, refer to “14. Troubleshooting” of the Safety Instruction Manual and remedy the
problem.
If a problem that is not described in “14. Troubleshooting” of the Safety Instruction Manual, stop using the system,
put the notice saying “Out of Order” on the system, and consult the office described on the back page of this manual.
1-86
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
2. CINE MEMORY AND STORE IMAGE

2-1. Cine Memory
A cine memory function is a function that temporarily stores an image in the memory of the equipment before the
image is frozen, so that you can observe the image after it has been frozen.
Even if you miss the freeze timing, you can search the necessary image from previously displayed images.
When used together with ECG waveform, this function displays a scale and a search mark for searching an image
in a certain time phase.
The cine memory has a search mode that enables B mode images to be observed, and a scroll function that enables
M and D mode images to be observed.
If two images are displayed, such as in the 2B, B/M or B/D mode, you can store each image separately and observe
it. However, when one of the images is displayed in real-time, you cannot perform either a search or a scrolling op-
eration.
Note
Keep the following points in mind when using the cine memory.
The amount of image data that can be held in the memory differs depending upon the probe used, the display
mode, display depth and other image display conditions. It is not constant.
Note
Keep the following points in mind when using the cine memory.
(1) Only images held in the memory can be searched or scrolled.
If you freeze an image immediately after releasing the freeze state, you can search or scroll the images
held in the memory during this interval, even if the memory is not filled to capacity.
If the capacity of the memory is exceeded, images in the memory are erased in the sequence from the
oldest image from the point where the image was frozen.
You cannot perform a search or scroll operation on an erased image.
(2) When you cancel the freeze condition, the images held in the memory up to that point in time are deleted.

2-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
1) Search function and scroll function

(Search function)
If you perform a forward search until the newest image in the memory is displayed, then continue further, the oldest
image re-appears, and a forward search takes place again.
Loop is formed in the memory.
Screen display image

Rolling to the left Track Rolling to the right
Frames are fed backward. ball Frames are fed forward.
Counterclockwise Clockwise
Frames are fed backward. Frames are fed forward.
Rotary encoder 1
Fig. Search function
(Scroll function)
If you perform a forward scroll until the newest image in the memory is displayed, the scroll operation is terminated
at that point. (A loop is not created as in the case of a search.)
Memory capacity
Screen
No loop in formed in
display
the memory.
range
Rolling to the left Track Rolling to the right

Frames are scrolled ball Frames are scrolled
backward. forward.
Counterclockwise rotation Clockwise rotation

images are scrolled backward. images are scrolled forward.
Rotary encoder 1
Fig. Scroll function
2-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
2) Search number
If you freeze an image, a search number appears on the screen.

The displayed position differs depending upon the mode. (There is no display related to the scroll function.)
The frame number of the image displayed

on the screen changes along with the
progress of a search.
2B mode
B mode
35/35
:Display position
Total number of frames

B/M(D) mode Up and down stored in the memory.
mode
Fig. Search number
2-3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
<Searching or scrolling B, M or D mode image>

→ The image freezes.

→ The system goes into a status that permits a Freeze
search or scrolling operation to be performed.
[Remark] SEARCH Press

You can set the system by means of a preset so that a search
or a scrolling operation automatically takes place without You can scroll with the trackball.
any need to press the SEARCH switch.
(3) Using the trackball, perform a search or scrolling

operating inside the necessary image range.
→ Rolling the trackball to the right causes a Searched
search or scrolling operation to take place in image
the forward direction, and rolling it to the left
causes the search or scrolling operation to take
place in the reverse direction.
<Searching or scrolling B/M or B/D mode images>

→ The image freezes and the search number is displayed on the B mode image.

→ A search or scroll operation can now be performed.
[Remark]
You can set a preset so that a search or scroll operation starts automatically without any need to press the SEARCH
switch.
(3) When the M mode image is active and the D mode image is non-active, scroll the M mode images with the
trackball, and search the D mode images with rotary encoder1.
[Remark]
When the active and non-active images are changed over by pressing the SELECT switch, the trackball searches B
mode images, and rotary encoder1 searches M mode image is active and the D mode image.
[Remark]
If you call one image with the request function, the image can be searched or scrolled. You can perform a search or
scrolling operation using the trackball.
2-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
2-1-2. Cine scale and search mark

If you operate the cine memory while an ECG waveform is displayed, the cine scale and the search mark are dis-
played on the ECG waveform.
This enables you to readily obtain a grasp of the memory capacity, the ratio of one frame to the capacity, and the
time phase on the ECG waveform of the currently displayed image.
Search mark
Cine scale
Length of one frame
Fig. Cine scale and search mark
Cine scale : The cine scale is displayed when the image is frozen.
Because it is displayed on the ECG waveform, you can tell what time phase is being searched.
A scale is displayed every 10 frames.
Search mark : The search mark moves along with the progress of a search.
It indicates the location in the memory and the time phase on the ECG waveform of the searched
image.
Note
(1) Keep the following points in mind when using the cine scale.
The cine scale becomes the total length of the number of frames stored in the memory, so it does not nec-
essarily have a fixed length.
(2) When many images with a slow frame rate are stored in the memory, the entire cine scale cannot always
be contained within a frame.
2-5
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
2-1-3. Loop playback function

This function continuously plays back images stored in the cine memory (loop playback).
Loop playback can be performed in the B and 2B modes.
In the case of the 2B mode, however, only the images on one half of the screen at a time are played back.
2-1-3-1. Method of performing loop playback
(1) Press the SEARCH switch, then roll the trackball upward.
→ Loop playback starts.
[Remark]
During loop playback, the search mark does not appear on the cine scale.
(2) Set loop production speed.

→ Rolling the trackball downward reduces the speed.
Rolling the trackball upward increases the speed.
[Remark]
With reproduction speed lowered, reproduction in slow motion starts.
Once again, the frame rate appears at bottom right of the screen for about 5 seconds.
(3) Rolling the trackball to the right or left.

→ Loop playback ends.
[Remark]
A search mark appears at the time phase position of the image displayed at this time.
2-1-3-2. Method of setting the loop playback range

You can set the loop point to any desired position.
[Remark]
By using the preset, you can automatically set the loop point to the R wave position of the last ECG1 heartbeat before
the image was frozen. For details, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
(1) Press the SEARCH switch, then roll the trackball to display the starting frame of the loop.
(2) Press the MARK REF switch to finalize the starting point.
→ The time phase setting mark appears.
(3) Using the trackball, display the end frame of the loop.
(4) Press the MARK REF switch to finalize the end point.
→ The time phase setting mark appears, and the search mark moves to the starting point.
[Remark]
Pressing the MARK REF switch repeatedly finalizes the starting point/end point alternately.
2-6
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-1.Cine Memory
[Remark]
Loop playback takes place between the lower frame number whose time phase was set, as the starting point, and the
higher frame number, as the end point.
(5) Unfreeze the image.

→ The set time phase is canceled.
2-1-3-3. Simultaneous loop playback of 2B images

In the case of the 2B mode, you can perform loop playback of both the left and right images.
(1) Display a 2B mode image.

[Remark]
While the images are frozen, you can set the loop points for each image using SELECT switch.
(2) Roll the trackball upward.

→ Loop playback starts.
(3) Roll the trackball right or left.

→ Loop playback ends.
[Remark]
If there is a difference between the number of left and right playback images, you can set Loop Mode in the menu
to either Short, which forms a loop based on the smaller number of images, or Long, which forms a loop based on
the larger number of images.
2-7
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send
2-2. Store/Send
Store/Send function enables you to store images using a digital storage function that conforms to the DICOM stan-
dard, and also enables you to send data via a digital interface and a network to a personal computer (server).
• Image information data are recorded to a MO disk digitally, or retrieved from it.
• Image data are output to a disk with converting them to any format of JPG, TIFF, or BMP.
• An ultrasonic diagnostic equipment is connected to a network directly, and digital data are transmitted to PCs and/
or Network server.
• Recorded images are arranged in the multi-format, and they are printed to DICOM printer.
Images stored under the DICOM standard include not only image data, patient data (name, ID, sex, date of birth,
etc.) but also comments, a color palette and also the name of the diagnostic equipment and calibration data for per-
forming playback measurement. This is convenient for restudying an image or performing playback measurement.
The following table shows the file formats in which images can be stored in the SSD-4000.
Moving an image
Frozen image
(when a VCM is connected)
FD MO Network MO Network
JPG JPG
TIFF DICOM TIFF DICOM DICOM DICOM
BMP BMP
SSD-4000
SSD-4000
+SOP-4000-20B
(DICOM LIBRARY SOFTWARE)
SSD-4000
+SOP-4000-20B
+EU-9083(VCM) or EU-9111 (VCM)
SSD-4000
+EU-9083 or EU-9111
Note
To ensure that the entire system conforms to electrical safety standard IEC606601-1-1, use an MO disk drive
that conforms to IEC60950.
For details, contact your nearest Aloka office.
2-8
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send
Note
Power to the MO disk drive is controlled by the Power switch of the ultrasound diagnostic equipment. When
you set the Power switch of the ultrasound diagnostic equipment to OFF, the power to the MO disk drive also
goes OFF. If you turn OFF the Power switch while data is being written to the MO disk, part or all of the data
written to the disk may be destroyed. To prevent this, check the following before turning OFF the Power
switch of the equipment.
(1) Confirm that the message “Please wait...” is not displayed on the monitor.
(2) Confirm that the Busy lamp on the MO disk drive is not lit.
Note
Although the power to the MO disk drive is controlled by the Power switch of the ultrasound diagnostic
equipment, there is also a Power switch that is independent of the MO disk drive. It is recommended that you
leave this Power switch ON. Confirm that the Power switch of the MO disk drive is ON, and then turn ON
the power to the main equipment.
If you switch ON the MO disk drive after switching ON the main equipment, the disk drive will not be recog-
nized, and you will be unable to use it.
Note
If you apply vibration while the disk is in the drive, you may damage the disk.
Note
In order to prevent accidental erasure of data on a disk, this equipment does not have an MO disk formatting
function. Use a commercially available formatted 3.5 MO disk. Recommended disk manufacturers are as fol-
lows:
TDK MO-R128DSN
Maxell MA-128.DOS.AIP
Kao MORW128DS1PN
Sony EDM-128DFB
3M OD3-230DOS
All of these MO disks are 3.5 inch disks. They are formatted using physical and logical formats specified by
the DICOM standard. The DICOM standard stipulates ISO10090 for the physical format, and MS-DOS
(Ver.5.0 or higher) for the logical format.
In addition to the above types, you can use 3.5-inch, 128-Megabyte, 230-Megabyte, 540-Megabyte or 640-
Megabyte disks marked “MS-DOS Ver.5 formatted”.
Note
When saving an image in the DICOM format, do not use a 1.3-Gigabyte disk. The DICOM standard does not
support a 1.3-Gigabyte disk.
Note
You cannot use an overwrite type disk.
2-9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send
Note
Once you record data to an MO disk, you cannot subsequently change it or erase it from this equipment (you
can read the recorded data and, while leaving the original data on the disk, additionally create data to which a
change has been added). Consequently, before recording image data to a disk, check very carefully to ensure
that there is no error in the text data (data entered from the keyboard) to be recorded together with it. Particu-
larly, if there is an error in an entry such as the patient's name or patient's ID, it will be difficult to subsequent
retrieve image data.
Caution
When connecting an SSD-4000 fitted with the SOP-4000-20B to a network that is not used specifically for
medical equipment, observe the following precautions to ensure that the entire system, including all con-
nected devices, conforms to the IEC60601-1-1 electrical safety standard.
(1) All non-medical equipment (hubs workstations, personal computers, etc.) that are connected to the SSD-
4000 must conform to IEC60950, and in addition must be Class I devices.
(2) Non-medical equipment (hubs workstations, personal computers, etc.) must not be installed in the envi-
ronment in which the patient is located (within 1.5 m from the patient).
(3) If the room in which non-medical equipment is installed is different to the room in which ultrasound
diagnostic equipment is installed, be sure to connect the equipment using a separation device (network
hub).
2-10
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send

Use the STORE switch to store the currently displayed image data in the hard disk (max 999 images) of the equip-
ment, CD-R, MO disk or a network server. The storage location of the image differs according to the location as-
signed to the STORE switch. In addition, after selecting a storage location for the image data with menu, you can
save them.
[Remark]
When you wish to store image data on an external disk in the JPG, TIFF or BMP file format, it is necessary to first
store the data in the hard disk of the equipment.
Only for JPG format, however, it can be directly saved on an external disk.
For details, refer to Section 2-3. “Review Function”.
[Remark]
If you allocate a number of storage destinations to different switches in advance, you can easily switch over the stor-
age location for each storage operation. For details, refer to Section 6-10. “CUSTOM-FOOT SW,-TB,RE,-FUNC-
TION SW”.
2-2-1-1. Saving images with STORE switch
<When Store on MO (S) is assigned>

When an MO drive is not connected

→ The STORE switch lights green.
(2) Search for the image to store from the cine memory, and display it.

→ The image data is stored in the hard disk of the equipment.
After the image data is stored, the message “Image stored successfully. #***/999.” appears at the
bottom of the screen.
When an MO drive is connected


→ The image data is saved in the MO disk in the DICOM format.
After the data is stored, the message “Process completed.” appears at the bottom of the screen.
[Remark]
When pressing the STORE switch without loading an MO disk, it displays an error message and is unable to save
any data image.
2-11
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send
<When Store on HDD (S) is assigned>

The image data is stored in the hard disk in the equipment, regardless of whether or not an MO drive is connected.
The operation is the same as that which takes place when the MO drive is not connected.
<When Store on CD-R BUFFER (S) is assigned>
When an CD-R drive is connected


→ The image data is saved in the CD-R Buffer in the DICOM format.
After the data is stored, the message “Process completed.” appears at the bottom of the screen.
[Remark]
When Store on CD-R BUFFER (M) is being assigned, moving image data can be saved in the CD-R Buffer by the
same operation.
When Store on CD-R BUFFER (J) is being assigned, image data in JPEG format can be saved in the CD-R Buffer
by the same operation.
(4) When writing to the CD-R, press the Review switch and then press the CD-R Writing.
→ The image saved in the Buffer is written in the CD-R.
As for the operation of Review screen, refer to Section 2-3. “Review Function”.
<When Store on FD (JPG) is assigned>


→ An image data is saved on a floppy disk in JPEG method.
Then the file name is given as “the number of times saved and today's date (six digits)” automatically.
After the saving, a message of “Process completed” is displayed on the bottom of screen.
<When Store on MO (JPG) is assigned>


→ An image data is saved on a MO disk in JPEG format.
Then the file name is given as “ID - today's date - Application - Consecutive numbers” automatically.
After the saving, a message of “Process completed” is displayed on the bottom of screen.
2-12
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-2.Store/Send
<When Send to Storage (S) is assigned>

(2) Search for the image to store server from the cine memory, and display it.

→ The image data is sent to the network server in the DICOM format.
2-2-1-2. Saving images with Menu
(1) Press the FREEZE switch and search an image to store from the cine memory and display it.

→ A menu is displayed on the screen.
[Remark]
(3) A storage location of image data is selected by the item on the menu with the rotary encoder 2.
(4) Press the menu select switch.

→ The image data selected are transmitted to the selected storage location.
2-13
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2-3. Review Function

This review function is for playing back, saving and/or transferring those static or loop images saved in the equip-
ment internally or externally.
[Remark]
Option EU-9083(VCM) or EU-9111(VCM) is necessary to reproduction of loop images.
2-3-1. Image Browser

2-3-1-1. Basic operation
(1) Freeze an image, then press the REVIEW switch.
→ The Image Browser screen is displayed, and the image data in the hard disk is displayed as thumbnail
images.
[Remark]
Patients' images being input with IDs are shown in sequential order of dates either from old or new.
It can be set with Common Preset 2.
I : Static image
I : Loop image
II
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the image that you wish to display over the entire screen, and press
the SET switch.
→ The image is surrounded by a blue border.
[Remark]
Pressing the SET switch once again restores the white border. If you wish to display a number of images over the
entire screen, repeat step (2).
(3) With the arrow on the selected image, press the SET switch twice in rapid succession.
→ The selection image is displayed over the entire screen, and the Next, Prev and Return buttons are
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
When the SEARCH switch is pressed with the full screen displaying a Loop image, the image data is
loaded in the VCM and it is feasible for the Loop playback.
2-14
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
[Remark]
If you selected multiple images, then press the SET switch when the arrow is on the Next button, the image selected
next will appear. If you select the Prev button, the image selected previously will appear.
[Remark]
Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Return button and press the SET switch. The full-screen display will close
and return to a thumbnail display.
(4) Press the Review switch.

→ The review function is terminated, and the image freezes again.
2-3-1-2. Description of each button on the Image Browser screen

Find
(List box) Switches over the read destination of the image that you wish to display.
Select HDD (hard disk in the equipment) , MO, Bufer or FD.
Search Reads image data from the media which is selected.
All Window Selects the thumbnail images of all pages. All of the images are displayed with a blue border,
indicating that they are selected. When you press this button once again, all images return to
the non-selected state.
Send Print
DICOM Prints the selected image on a DICOM printer in the network.
(SOP-4000-20B is necessary.)
Local Prints the selected image on a PC printer connected to the equipment.
Property Sets the format and other parameters necessary for printing an image.
Store
(List box) Sets the format for storing image data in an MO, Buffer or FD.
Select BMP, TIFF, JPEG or DICOM.
Store on Disk Stores the selected image data in an external disk.
CD-R Writing Writes the image which is saved in the CD-R Buffer to a CD-R .
Buffer Erase
When OK is selected, the image saved in the CD-R Buffer is erased.

When Cancel is selected, the image saved in the CD-R Buffer is not erased.
2-15
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
Send Image
DICOM Storage Chosen image data are transmitted to a server on a network in the DICOM format.
(SOP-4000-20B is necessary.)
Delete
This Image Deletes the selected image data from the hard disk.
When image data in an MO is displayed, the thumbnail images are deleted from
the screen.
All Deletes the displayed image data for all pages from the hard disk.
When image data in an MO is displayed, all of the thumbnail images are deleted from the
screen.
Layout Sets up a format of thumbnail display.

Selectes for 2×2, 3×2, 3×3, 4×3, 4×4 and 6×4.
Changes The page number of a Layout.

,
Button : Returns to the previous page.
Button : Proceeds to the next page.
2-3-1-3. Reading an image from the hard disk in the equipment
(1) Set Find to HDD, using the trackball, move the arrow to Search, then press the SET switch.
→ The Load (HDD) Patient image is displayed, and the patient list of image data stored in the equipment
is displayed.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the patient name whose image you wish to display, and press the SET
switch.
→ The selected patient name and ID are reversed blue and are displayed.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Load, then press the SET switch.
→ Thumbnail images of the selected patient are displayed on the Image Browser screen in sequence from
the oldest date.
[Remark]
When you press the Continuous button on the Load (HDD) Patient screen, all of the image data in the equipment is
displayed as thumbnail images.
2-16
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2-3-1-4. Reading an image from an CD-R Buffer, MO disk or CD-R disk
(1) After setting the Find to a media from which reads in, move the arrow to Search with the trackball, then
→ The Search dialog box is displayed.
Search Key is used to enter an ID, Name or Date as a key word for searching for patient data.
Sort Key is used to arrange the retrieved patient data in the sequence of ID or Name. Ascend or Descend arranges
the data in ascending or descending order.
(2) Enter the key word, using the trackball, move the arrow to Search, then press the SET switch.
→ The DICOM Select screen appears, and a list of patients appears under -Patient-.
[Remark]
If you press the Search button without entering anything, a list of all patients will be displayed.
Palette : The color image recorded in Palette is read in the Palette format.
RGB : The color image recorded in Palette is read while being converted into RGB.
Studies : Displays the number of patient examinations.
Patient Name : Displays the patient’s name.
Patient Identification : Displays the patient’s ID.
2-17
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the button below Studies corresponding to the patient whose data you
wish to read, then press the SET switch.
→ A list of examinations appears in -Study ID-.
Series : The number of series of images is displayed.

Date : Displays the date on which an examination was started.
Time : Displays the time at which the examination was started.
Study ID : Displays the examination ID.
Description : Displays a description on the ID screen.
2-18
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Series of the examination that you wish to read, and press the SET
switch.
→ A list of images corresponding to the examination date appears under -Series-.
Images : Displays the number of sets of image data.

MDL : Displays the kind of equipment used.
Body Part : Displays the part of the body that was examined.
Description : Displays a description when an image is stored.
Date : Display the date on which image recording was started.
Time : Displays the time at which image recording was started.
FRM : Display the number of image frames.
(5) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Images of the image data that you wish to read, and press the SET
switch.
→ The selected image data items are highlighted in blue.
(6) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Load button, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected image data appears on the Image Browser.
2-19
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2-3-1-5. Storing an image

Using the trackball, move the arrow to the image that you wish to store in Image Browser, and press the SET switch.
The selected image is highlighted in blue. Store the selected image either in an external disk or in a file server in a
network.
[Remark]
Saving a Loop image is limited to a DICOM format.
<Storing an image in the DICOM format>

In the case of the DICOM format, the image data can be stored either in an MO disk, CD-R disk or in a server in a
network.
1) MO Disk
(1) After selecting an image, set the format to DICOM in Store and set the save destination to the MO.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Store on Disk, and press the SET switch.
→ A storage dialog box appears.
Color : Selects whether to store a Flow mode image in the Palette format (black and white, flow
velocity, dispersed data), or in the RGB format (R, G, B data).
Window : Selects whether the image to be stored is the selected image (blue border) or all images
in Image Browser.
Series Description : Adds a comment to the image.
(3) After entering each item as necessary, selects Store on the dialog box.
→ The image is stored in the DICOM format in the MO disk.
2-20
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2) CD-R Disk
(1) After selecting an image, sets the format to DICOM in the Store box.
(2) Sets the save destination to the CD-R.
→ The image is stored in the CD-R Buffer.
[Remark]
The capacity of CD-R Buffer is 640M byte maximum. When an image file is larger than the buffer capacity, adjust
the image file capacity to less than 640M byte by dividing.
(4) Select CD-R Writing with the trackball and insert a blank media to the CD-R drive.
→ As writes the images which is saved in the CD-R Buffer to the CD-R, the following popup-menu is
displayed.
[Remark]
With turning BufferErase On, you can erase the data saved in the buffer after writing the image in the CD-R.
When copying two or more disks of CD-R, select Off.
[Remark]
As for a usable media, it is limited to a CD-R media; with 32 double speed or more; and with 640M byte or more.
Recommended media makers are Ricoh, Maxell, Taiyo Yuden, and Verbatim/Mitsubishi Chemicals.
A DVD and a CD-RW are not supported.
[Remark]
As for a CD-R Media, a blank one should be used.
This function supports a write-once optical disk.
(5) Press Start of popup-menu.

→ Writes the image which is saved in the CD-R Buffer to the CD-R.
A progress bar is displayed with the start of writing. A popup-menu which tells the finish is displayed
at the time of the writing-in completed.
[Remark]
Do not disconnect the power supply of the unit while writing in.
There is a case damaging the CD drive in the unit.
Moreover, it is not allowed to examine during the writing.
Interrupt the examination until the writing is completed.
2-21
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
3) Network sending (Option: SOP-4000-20B is necessary)
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the DICOM Storage button, and press the SET switch.
→ A network transmission dialog box appears.
Color : Select whether to store a Flow mode image in the Palette format (black and white, flow
velocity, dispersed data), or in the RGB format (R, G, B data).
Window : Select whether the image to be stored is the selected image surrounded by a blue border
(Active) or all images in Image Browser (All).
Series Description : Add a comment to the image.
(2) After selecting and entering each item as necessary, select the Send button in the dialog box.
→ The image is sent to the network server in the DICOM format.
2-22
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
<Storing an image in the BMP, TIFF or JPEG format>

In the case of the BMP, TIFF or JPEG format, you can store image data in an MO disk, a CD-R or a floppy disk.
1) MO or FD disk
(1) After selecting an image, set the format to BMP, TIFF or JPEG in the Store box.
(2) Sets the save destination to the MO or the floppy-disk.
→ Display the dialog box for storing the image.
Window : Select whether the image to be stored is the selected image surrounded by a blue border
(Active) or all images in Image Browser (All).
Drive : Specify whether the storage destination is an MO disk or a floppy disk.
File Name : Enter the filename of the image to be stored.
(4) Set and enter each item as necessary.

→ When the system is ready to store the image, the Store button in the dialog box can be pressed.
[Remark]
Be sure to enter the filename. When the dialog box appears, the filename is automatically displayed in the File Name
box. The filename is displayed in the form “Today's date (6 digits) - Number of times the file was stored on that day”.
As an example, if you store the third image that was automatically assigned to a filename on August 27, 2001, the
filename will become “010827-3”.
(5) Select the Store button in the dialog box.

→ The image data is stored in the specified file format and under the conditions set in the dialog box.
2-23
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2) CD-R Disk
(1) After selecting an image, set the format to BMP, TIFF or JPEG in Store.
(2) Sets the save destination to the CD-R.
→ The image is stored in the CD-R Buffer.
[Remark]
The capacity of CD-R Buffer is 640M byte maximum. When an image file is larger than the buffer capacity, adjust
the image file capacity to less than 640M byte by dividing.
(4) Select the CD-R Writing with the trackball and insert a blank media to the CD-R drive.
→ As writes the images which is saved in the CD-R Buffer to the CD-R, the following popup-menu is
displayed.
[Remark]
With turning BufferErase On, you can erase the data saved in the buffer after writing the image in the CD-R.
When copying two or more disks of CD-R, select Off.
[Remark]
As for a usable media, it is limited to a CD-R media; with 32 double speed or more; and with 640M byte or more.
Recommended media makers are Ricoh, Maxell, Taiyo Yuden, and Verbatim/Mitsubishi Chemicals.
A DVD and a CD-RW are not supported.
[Remark]
As for a CD-R Media, a blank one should be used.
This function supports a write-once optical disk.
(5) Press the Start button of popup-menu.

→ The image saved in the CD-R Buffer is written to the CD-R.
A progress bar is displayed with the start of writing. A popup-menu which tells the finish is displayed
at the time of the writing-in completed.
[Remark]
Do not disconnect the power supply of the unit while writing in.
There is a case damaging the CD drive in the unit.
Moreover, it is not allowed to examine during the writing.
Interrupt the examination until the writing is completed.
2-24
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
2-3-1-6. Printing an image

You can print an image displayed on the Image Browser screen, using a DICOM printer or a PC printer specified by
Aloka.
<Printing data on a DICOM printer> (Option: SOP-4000-20B is necessary.)
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the image to be printed on Image Browser, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected image is displayed with a blue border.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the DICOM button, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected image is printed on the DICOM printer in the network.
<Printing on a local printer>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the image to be printed on the Image Browser, and press the SET
switch.
→ The selected image is displayed with a blue border.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Local button, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected image is printed on the Local printer.
2-25
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-3.Review Function
<Setting the printing conditions>

When you select the Property button on the Image Browser screen, a dialog box for making printing setting appears.
Fig. Print Property
• Local Printer
Printer Name Select the Local printer for printing the image.
Num of Copies Set the number of copies (sets of prints) to between 1 and 9.
Paper Size Set the size of the paper for making prints.
N-up Set the number of images to be printed on one sheet of paper.
Orientation Set the orientation of the print to either LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT.
Trim Set whether or not to leave a margin between images when printing multiple images on a single
sheet of paper.
• DICOM Printer
Model Name Select the DICOM printer for printing the image.
Appl. Entity Displays the name of the DICOM standard program.
Num of Copies Set the number of copies (sets of prints) to be made on the DICOM printer to between 1 and 9.
Medium Type Select the type of medium to be used for printing.
Film Size Set the size of the paper to be used for printing in the DICOM printer.
Orientation Set the orientation of the print to either LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT.
Display Format Set the display format to be used when printing multiple images on one sheet of paper.
Magnification Set the type of magnification.
Smoothing Set the type of smoothing.
Trim Set whether or not to leave a margin between images when printing multiple images on a single
sheet of paper.
Print priority Set the degree of priority of printing.
Destination Set the device at the printing destination.
Min Density Enter the minimum brightness for printing, as a numerical value.
Max Density Enter the maximum brightness for printing, as a numerical value.
Border Density Set the brightness of the border between images.
Empty Density Set the brightness of the parts where there are no images to be printed.
Image Polarity Set the polarity of the image to be printed.
Configuration info Make the settings that are peculiar to each printer.
2-26
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4.VCM (Video Cine Memory) (Option: when EU-9083 or EU-9111 is connected)
2-4. VCM (Video Cine Memory)

(Option: when EU-9083 or EU-9111 is connected)
A VCM is a DICOM standard digital storage option that automatically stores a moving image.
By adding a VCM, the following functions become available.
• A function that automatically acquires moving images at ECG sync intervals of 1, 2, 4 heartbeats.
• A function that digitally records or reads moving image data to or from an MO disk or a HDD.
• A function that sends digital data (moving images) to a personal computer or a network server when the ultrasound
diagnostic equipment is directly connected to a network (Option: when SOP-4000-20B is necessary)
• A function that compares an image previously stored in an MO or a HDD with the image acquired during the
presenet examination.
• A function that displays up to four screens, and performs loop playback in synchronism with the number of
frames.
• A function that stores a moving image obtained by a stress echo, for each stage and each slice surface, and plays
back the acquired image in steps of slice surface.
Because the data in the ultrasound diagnostic equipment is in digital form, there is no deterioration of the image
when it is recorded.
Images stored under the DICOM standard include not only image data, patient data (name, ID, sex, date of birth,etc.)
but also comments, a color palette and also the name of the diagnostic equipment and calibration data for performing
playback measurement. This is convenient for restudying an image or performing playback measurement.
2-27
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-1. Acquiring an image to the VCM
2-4-1-1. Preparations for acquiring a moving image
(1) Setting the acquisition period

When you press ECG Cycle on the keyboard of the VCM, a window for setting the heart rate at which the
image is to be acquired and the acquisition commencement time are displayed. Set these values
using rotary encoder 2 and the menu select switch.
The image to be acquired at each setting corresponds to the period indicated by in the figure.
[Remark]
There is no need to perform this setting if an ECG waveform is not displayed.
ACQUIRE switch
ECG wave
Current Next
Cycle Cycle
Current Next
2Cycles 2Cycles
Current Next
4Cycles 4Cycles
(2) Setting the number of screens.

If you press Format (VCM) on the keyboard of the VCM, a window for setting the format appears on the
VCM screen. Set the format by making a selection from Full (one screen), Split (two screens), Quad Small
(four screens) and Quad Large (4-screen enlarged display) using rotary encoder 2 and the menu select
switch. After you make a setting, the screen display changes, and the memory of the VCM is divided accord-
ing to the selected format.
[Remark]
If you set Split or Quad, the mark or appears at top left of the screen in the INT condition.
In this case, an image will be acquired to the VCM screen (active window) indicated by the white border.
[Remark]
The memory of the VCM is equally divided into the same number of sections as the number of divided screens set
by Format. The greater the number of divided screens, the fewer is the number of images that can be acquired to
one window.
2-28
MN1-1174 Rev.9
Format setting Screen format Memory
Full 1 1
Split 1 2 1 2
Quad Small 1 2
or 1 2 3 4
Quad Large 3 4
[Remark]
When you change the format after acquiring one or more images to the active window, a message asking you
whether you wish to retain or discard the image appears.
If you select Clear Image, all of the acquired images are discarded then the format changes.
If you select Transfer Image, of the images acquired to the active window, only the number of images corresponding
to the memory capacity of one window is transferred to the new format.
If you select Cancel, format change is interrupted.
[Remark]
It takes a certain amount of time to transfer an image.
Note
Check the following points when storing a moving image using the VCM function.
(1) Examine it with applying TV synchronization in the Frame setting of TV Sync. When not applying TV
synchronization, there may be shortened in fetching time, so that normal reading may not be certain
within an anticipated time.
(2) Confirm that the MO drive is switched ON. If it is not, it may sometimes be necessary to re-start the
equipment.
(3) The VCM function supports the B mode and 2B mode used with or without Flow or Power Flow.
It does not support sweep modes such as the B/M mode or the M mode.
2-4-1-2. Method of acquiring a moving image

There are two methods of acquiring a moving image. Depending upon the combination of the Format and Active
Window Shift functions of the VCM it may not always be possible to retain an acquired image.
When the FREEZE switch is OFF, the VCM continues to acquire image data.
If the memory capacity is exceeded, images are deleted in sequence from the oldest one.
2-29
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Acquiring an image using the FREEZE switch>

( When Format (VCM) is Full or Active Window Shift is Manual )
(1) Press the FREEZE switch to freeze the image.

→ Image acquisition is interrupted.
At this point in time
• If you press Store on Disk (M),all of the images acquired to the VCM are stored in the MO disk.
• If you press the Send to Storage (M), all of the images acquired to the VCM are transferred to the server.
(2) Press the FREEZE switch to cancel the freeze condition.

→ Old images are deleted and image acquisition resumes.
<Image acquisition using the ACQUIRE switch>

( When Format (VCM) is Full or Active Window Shift is Manual )
(1) Press the ACQUIRE switch to acquire an image.

→ If the ECG waveform is displayed, images corresponding to the number of heartbeats set by ECG Cycle
are acquired.
If an ECG waveform is not displayed, image acquisition stops automatically when the memory of the
active window becomes full.
[Remark]
If you press the FREEZE switch during image acquisition, the image at that point in time will be retained, and image
acquisition will be interrupted.
[Remark]
Depending on the timing of pressing FREEZE switch or Frame Rate, there are cases not to acquire the setting range
of heart rate as intended.
(2) Press the FREEZE switch twice.

→ If you perform a freeze or freeze cancel operation after image acquisition, old images will be deleted
and image acquisition will resume.
ECG CYCLE
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT NEXT NEXT NEXT

ECG Display
CARDIAC CARDIAC CARDIAC CARDIAC CARDIAC CARDIAC
CYCLE 2CYCLE 4CYCLE CYCLE 2CYCLE 4CYCLE
As the same as the Acquire, it is taken in
dependent on the heart rate that is set. However, The images to a freezing time are taken in up to
dependent on the timing for pressing FREEZE
the memory capacity.
ON switch or the Frame Rate, there are cases not to
be taken in to the setting range of heart rate as
intended. Images are saved up to the available
capacity of memory at the time of Freeze.
OFF The images to a freezing time are taken in up to the memory capacity.
2-30
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Method of operation for continuous acquisition>

When you wish to temporarily store images and perform continuous image acquisition, you must set Format of VCM
to a position other than Full, and also set Active Window Shift to Auto Shift. Under these settings, you can tempo-
rarily store up to four screens' worth of moving images.
When you press the ACQUIRE switch, image acquisition takes place according to the set conditions, then the VCM
automatically stops acquisition. Next, the image data acquired by ACQUIRE is held, and image acquisition starts
in the next memory.
[Remark]
When you press the FREEZE switch during image acquisition, the images acquired to that point in time are held,
and image acquisition stops.
[Remark]
If the waveform of a physiological signal (ECG, PCG or PULSE) is displayed in the B mode, the waveform imme-
diately after the image is acquired to the VCM may be partially cut depending upon the timing at which the image
is frozen.
In such a case, you can display the waveform of the physiological signal by using the Search function to display the
previous image.
2-31
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-2. Image search and loop playback using the VCM
2-4-2-1. Search box

The Begin frame No., current frame No. (playback frame rate in the case of loop playback) and End frame No. are
displayed in sequence from the left inside this search box.
During a search During a loop

B1108E108 B130HzE108
[Remark]
During loop playback the playback frame rate is displayed only for images acquired when TV sync is applied using
TV Sync (VCM).
2-4-2-2. Basic operation of image search and loop playback

After freezing an image, you can return the displayed frame (search function), or play back and display the acquired
image (consisting of a number of continuous frames) as a loop.
(1) Turn ON the VCM switch.
(2) Press the FREEZE switch to freeze the image.

→ A search box appears at bottom right of the screen.

→ Rolling the trackball to the left returns the displayed frame, while rolling it to the right advances the
displayed frame.
(4) You can perform loop playback of an image by rolling the trackball upward. By rolling the trackball
downward, loop playback takes place in slow motion.
[Remark]
You can change the speed of loop playback by rolling the trackball up or down. To stop loop playback, roll the
trackball left or right search operation.
2-32
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-2-3. Setting the start and end frames

When performing loop playback, you can perform loop playback between any two frames.
When storing an image acquired to the VCM, the image frames to be stored are the frames specified within the loop
playback range.
(1) Perform a search operation using the trackball and display the start frame, then press the MARK REF switch.
→ B in the search box changes to the specified frame No.
(2) Perform a search operation using the trackball and display the end frame, then press the MARK REF switch.
→ E in the search box changes to the specified frame No.
(3) Move the trackball upward.

→ Loop playback between the specified frames starts.
(4) Move the trackball left or right.

→ Loop playback stops.
2-4-2-4. Motion setting for multi-screen loop playback

When Format is set to multi-screen display and you wish to perform loop playback, you can align the playback point
with a short moving image, or align the playback speed with a long moving image.
After starting MENU, select the Loop Mode from the VCM menu page, and set the motion from Short, Long, Align
and Free Run.
Short : Playback takes place based on the shortest moving image. In the case of long moving images, the
images are scrolled to the end without being displayed, then playback takes place from the first image.
Long : Playback takes place based on the longest moving image. In the case of short moving images, the
images are played back to the end, then playback pauses, and when a long moving image returns to
the first image position, playback resumes.
Align : Playback takes place based on the longest moving image. In the case of a short moving image, the
playback speed falls so as to align the playback point with that of a long moving image.
Free Run: All images are played back at their respective playback speeds. If the lengths of moving images are
different to each other, the images will be displayed with phase error.
2-33
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-3. Storing image data in the VCM
2-4-3-1. Storing loop images to an MO disk

The image frames stored in an MO disk are the frames specified within the loop playback range by the VCM.
<Storing a loop image using the panel keys>

You can store a loop image acquired to the active window directly to an MO disk by pressing the keys on the
keyboard.
(1) If Format is set to multi-image display, press the SELECT switch, and select the image that you wish to store.
→ The blue border moves to the selected image. (Active window)
(2) Press Store on Disk (M)on the keyboard.

→ The loop playback image in the active window is stored in the MO disk.
[Remark]
If Format is set to Full, or if the Active Window Shift setting is Manual, you can store a pre-frozen image or an image
acquired with the ACQUIRE switch to an MO disk while it remains in the INT condition.
Storing using the menu
(2) Press the MENU switch, and select Store on Disk from the VCM menu page.
→ A dialog box appears at the center of the monitor screen.
(3) Put Multi in the Frame box into a selected status.

[Remark]
If the image is a color image, you can select whether to record it in the Palette Color format or in the RGM format
in the Color box.
[Remark]
If the Format setting is Split or Quad, and Active is selected in the Window box, only the image in the active window
will be recorded. If All is selected, all of the images in the window will be stored.
2-34
MN1-1174 Rev.9
[Remark]
If necessary, you can input an image description in the Series Description box using text.
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Store, and press the SET switch.
→ A loop playback image is stored in the MO disk.
[Remark]
You can assign Store to Disk to a function key on the keyboard by means of a preset.
2-4-3-2. Sending loop images to a network

The image frames that are sent to the network are the frames specified in the loop playback range of the VCM.
Sending to a network using the panel keys (Option : SOP-4000-20B is neccessary.)

By pressing the keys on the keyboard, the loop image acquired to the active window is sent directly to a network.
(2) If Format is set to multi-screen display, press the SELECTswitch, and select the image that you wish to send
to the network.
→ The blue border moves to the selected screen. (Active window)
(3) Press Send to Storage (M) on the keyboard.

→ The loop playback image data in the active window is sent to the file server.
[Remark]
If Format is set to Full, or if the Active Window Shift setting is Manual, you can store a pre-frozen image or an image
acquired with the ACQUIRE switch to a network disk while it remains in the INT condition.
2-35
MN1-1174 Rev.9
Sending images to a network using the menu (Option : SOP-4000-20B is neccessary.)
(2) Press the MENU switch, and select Send to Storage from the VCM menu page.
→ A dialog box appears in the center of the monitor screen.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Multi of the Frame box in the dialog box, and press the SET switch.
[Remark]
If the image is a color image, you can select whether to record it in the Palette Color format or in the RGM format
in the Color box.
[Remark]
If the Format setting is Split or Quad, and Active is selected in the Window box, only the image in the active window
will be sent. If All is selected, all of the images in the window will be sent.
[Remark]
If necessary, you can input an image description in the Series Description box using text.
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Send, and press the SET switch.
→ The loop playback image data is sent to the file server.
[Remark]
You can assign Send to Store to a function key on the keyboard using a preset.
2-36
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-3-3. Saving a loop images to a Hard disk

Image data of sliced image comprising of multiple frames are saved in a hard disk of the equipment.
Image frames saved to the hard disk are specified frames of a loop playback range in VCM.
By selecting a menu, you can save a loop image fetched to the active window to the hard disk of the equipment.
(1) When the format is a multi-display, press the SELECT switch and select the image intended to save.
→ The blue boarder shifts to the image selected.
(2) Press the MENU switch and select the Store on HDD (M) on the menu.
→ The loop image on the active window is stored (saved) to the hard disk in the equipment.
2-37
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-4-4. Reading image data in the VCM

You can read image data stored in MO, HDD, Buffer or CD and display it on the screen.
The object image is automatically judged to be a still image or a loop image. In the case of a loop image, you can
also perform a search and loop playback after reading the data.
(2) Press the MENU switch, and select Loadfrom the menu.
→ A Load screen and Search dialog box are displayed on the screen.
Load Media :
Selects either MO, HDD, Buffer or CD for reading image data.
Search Key :
Enter ID, Name or Date as the keyword for searching for patient data.
Sort Key :
Arrange the retrieved patient data in the sequence of ID, Name or Time,
in ascending (Ascend) or descending (Descend) order.
(3) After entering the keyword, move the Search button using the trackball, and press the SET switch.
→ The DICOM select screen appears, and a list of patients matching the conditions entered in -Patient-
appears.
[Remark]
If you select the Search button without entering a keyword, a list of all patients will be displayed.
Palette The color image recorded in Palette is read in the Palette format.
RGB The color image recorded in Palette is read while being converted into RGB.
Studies Displays the number of patient examinations.
Patient Name Displays the patient’s name.
Patient Identification Displays the Patient’s ID.
2-38
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Studies for the patient whose data you wish to read, and press the
SET switch.
→ A list of examinations appears in -Study ID-.
Series The number of series of images is displayed.

Date Displays the date on which an examination was started.
Time Displays the time at which the examination was started.
Study ID Displays the examination ID.
Description Displays a description on the ID screen.
2-39
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(5) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Series of the Study ID corresponding to the data that you wish to
read, and press the SET switch.
→ A list of images corresponding to the examination date appears under -Series-.
Images Displays the number of sets of image data.

MDL Displays the kind of equipment used.
Body Part Displays the part of the body that was examined.
Description Displays a description when an image is stored.
Date Display the date on which image recording was started.
Time Displays the time at which imagerecording was started.
FRM Display the number of image frames.
(6) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Images corresponding to the image data that you wish to read, and
→ The selected image data item is highlighted in blue.
(7) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Load button, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected image data is displayed on the active window.
2-40
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-5.Continuous Acquire function (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)
2-5. Continuous Acquire function (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)

Continuous Acquire repeats operation of Acquire and Acquire-Pause so that it can capture required moving images
when needed.
Continuous Acquire includes the following functions.
a. Captures moving images continuously on the VCM

Browses the captured images after finishing Acquire.
b. Stores the captured images on the VCM to the HDD.
c. Image Browser stores the captured images on the HDD to external media.
d. The images stored on the HDD or external media can be browsed with the device.
[Remark]
This function can be operated with B, 2B, B Flow, 2B Flow images only. Other modes are not supported.
[Remark]
The number of Frames that can be captured varies according to the VCM-Color Mode settings of the Common Preset
as follows.
Color Mode settings of the Common Preset The number of Frames

VCM that can be captured
Always B/W Approx. 3300 Frames
Always Color Approx. 1600 Frames
2-5-1. Switch applied
function name Assigned switch function

(Preset Default)
Continuous Acquire F11 key Starts or ends the Continuous Acquire function.
Load(Continuous) F12 key Loads acquired images using the Continuous Acquire
operation of moving images from the HDD or external media.
Store(Continuous) F13 key Stores acquired images using the Continuous Acquire
operation of moving images to the HDD.
2-5-2. Preparing Continuous Acquire

[Remark]
It is recommended using VCR for backup of inspection records.
2-41
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-5-3. Capturing images using Continuous Acquire function
<Operation method>
(1) Enter an ID and press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu).
→ Continuous Acquire screen appears.
display Status of acquiring to the

memory
ACQUIRE Capturing moving images
ACQ-PAUSE Pausing of moving image
capture
• The status of acquiring image to the VCM is displayed on the top left of the screen.
• As an assistance message, the number of remaining Studies is displayed on the bottom left of the screen for a few
seconds.
• The remaining memory capacity is displayed on the bottom right of the screen.
[Remark]
If you press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu) without entering any IDs, the Continuous Acquire cannot
be operated. The dialog box warning no ID is entered, so enter an ID and press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the
menu).
[Remark]
If you want to acquire Flow images, select Always Color on the VCM (EU-9111)-Color Mode settings of the Com-
mon Preset and set On on Flow, and press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu).
[Remark]
When you set Always B/W on the VCM (EU-9111)-Color Mode and Off on Flow and press F11 key (Continuous
Acquire of the menu), the color bar and Flow Area become black even if you change On on Flow during an acquring
operation.
[Remark]
If Always Color is set on VCM-Color Mode, B/W images can be captured successfully.
2-42
MN1-1174 Rev.9
VCM(EU-9111) Frame number that Flow Mode status when staring Acquring B/ Acquring
Color Mode settings can be captured Continuous Acquire of moving W images Flow
images images
Always B/W Approx. 3,300 On Possible Possible
Frames
Approx. 3,300 Off Possible Impossible
Frames
Always Color Approx. 1,600 On Possible Possible
Frames
Approx. 1,600 Off Possible Possible
Frames
[Remark]
When Freeze is set to On, no operation starts even F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu) is pressed. The follow-
ing assistance massage is displayed, so set Freeze off and then press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu) again.
Please press <Freeze> button. Then try again.

[Remark]
When ECG Sync is set to On, Continuous Acquire switch cannot be operated. The following assistance massage
is displayed, so set ECG SYNC off and then press F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu) again.
Turn off ECG SYNC. Then try again.

[Remark]
When Intermittent Method is set to ECG, no operation starts even F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu) is
pressed. The following assistance massage is displayed, so set Intermittent Method to Time and then press F11 key
(Continuous Acquire of the menu) again.
Change Intermittent Method to Time. Then try again.

[Remark]
When operating the Continuous Acquire, the setting of Intermittent Method cannot be changed even if the device
status is Acquire-Pause.
[Remark]
If many images are stored on the HDD, an error message is displayed and the Continuous Acquire function of mov-
ing images cannot be operated. Save images on the HDD to external media by using the Image Browser to secure
memory capacity, and operate the Continuous Acquire of moving images.
[Remark]
The Continuous Acquire of moving images resets all images on the VCM before operation. When images are stored
on the VCM, the following message will be displayed.
• Select Cancel if you save the images on the VCM.

• Select OK if you do not save them.
→ The operation of the Continuous Acquire of moving images starts.
2-43
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Operation method>Acquiring moving images continuously
(1) Press the Acquire switch.

→ Images are captured to the VCM continuously.
Capturing continues till the Acquire switch is pressed again to pause acquiring (or the VCM is full of data).
[Remark]
During acquiring, image adjustment function other than Gain and STC are not available.
When changing image adjustment, press the Acquire switch to pause the image capturing.
<Operation method>Pausing acquiring
(1) Press the Acquire switch again during acquiring.

→ It pauses capturing images to the VCM temporally.
[Remark]
Image adjustment functions other than Gain and STC are available in this status.
[Remark]
When images other than B, 2B, B Flow, 2B Flow images, the Acquire switch is not lit and it cannot be operated.
When starting image acquiring operation again, display B, 2B, B Flow, or 2B Flow images and press the Acquire
switch to restart image capturing.
<Operation method>Restarting acquiring
(1) Press the Acquire switch.

→ It captures images to the VCM continuously adding to the images already captured before the acquiring
have paused.
Repeating the operations above (acquiring, pausing and restarting) can capture required moving images when needed.
<Operation method>Completion of the Continuous Acquire function (ending acquiring)
(1) Press the F11 key (Continuous Acquire from the menu ).
→ The following the Finish Acquisition dialog box is displayed.
• When completion of image acquiring, select Yes.

• When retuning the pausing acquiring, select Cancel.
[Remark]
If you turn the power off before operating Store (Continuous), the images captured on the VCM are not stored and
deleted.
2-44
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-5-4. Browsing images using Continuous Acquire function
<Operation method>
(1) Select Yes on the Finish Acquisition dialog box.

→ It loops playback of continuously captured moving images, repeating operation of Acquire and Acquire-
Pause, with a four-screen display.
Cycle No (corresponding data/all data acquired) is displayed on the bottom left of the screen.
[Remark]
Division of a four-screen display
If an ECG wave exists during image capturing, the images are categorized and displayed by heart rates.
If no ECG wave exists, the images are categorized and displayed based on when the image acquiring paused.
(2) Select a image to display full size screen to press the SELECT switch or left/right operation of the track-
ball.The blue frame moves to select the image.
[Remark]
When the number of acquiring is more than five, images are displayed on multiple pages.
(3) Press the SET switch while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange)
→ The image specified by the blue frame is displayed in full size.
When a image is displayed in full size, the following operations are available.
• Changing the Loop playback speed.

(1) Move the trackball up and down while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange).
→ It changes the playback speed.
• Stopping the Loop playback

(1) Move the trackball left and right while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange).
→ It stops Loop playback.
2-45
MN1-1174 Rev.9
• Searching the still images.

(1) Move the trackball left and right while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange.)
→ It starts searching still images.
• Restarting the Loop playback.

(1) Move the trackball up and down quickly while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange.)
→ It restarts Loop playback.
• Switching the four-screen display to the full size display.

(1) During the full size display, press the SET switch while the SEARCH switch is On (the lamp is lit in orange.)
→ It returns to the four-screen display.
[Remark]
If you want to display real-time images when browsing the images, Press the VCM switch. The real time images are
displayed.
When returning from the real-time images display to the browsing display, make sure to display a B, 2B, B Flow,
or 2B Flow image and press the VCM switch again.
[Remark]
During the browsing display, the Acquire switch (multiple data acquiring) cannot be operated.
2-46
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-5-5. Storing image data
<Operation method>
(1) Press F13 key (Store (Continuous) of the menu) during the browsing display.
→ The following the Store (Continuous) dialog box is displayed.
[Remark]
Storing mage is both available while selecting the four-screen display and the full size display.
(2) Select the storing format button (Multi (All), Multi (Active), or Single).
→ Image are stored in the format selected.
Store(Continuous) Functions description

dialog button
Multi(All) Stores all images captured to the HDD.
(It creates the same number of moving image files as that of pressing the Acquire switch).
Multi(Active) When the four-screen display is selected, it stores the image specified with the blue frame to the
HDD.
When the full size display is selected, it stores the image displayed to the HDD.
(When you want to store images divided by heart beat, select Multi (Active)).
Single Stores the still image displayed to the HDD.
[Remark]
The Single button on the Store (Continuous) dialog box cannot be operated while you select the four-screen display.
It is available only when selecting the full size display.
[Remark]
While storing images, the device displays real time images.
When it completes image storing, the VCM switch is lit. If you want to store images continuously, press the VCM
switch, and F13 key to store images.
2-47
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-5-6. Completion of the Continuous Acquire function

The following operation ends the Continuous Acquire function.
• When using the NEW PATIENT switch

Conduct the inspection of the next patient not storing the images on the
VCM.The device resets the VCM memory and the next study is available.
• When using F11 key (Continuous Acquire of the menu)

Conduct the Continuous Acquire inspection of the same patient additionally.
(1) Press the F11 key.

→ The following the Start Continuous dialog box is displayed.
(2) Select OK.

→ It starts the Continuous Acquire function.
• When using the Preset switch

Conduct inspections other than the Continuous Acquire of the same patient additionally.
The preset of the normal mode is called and the same study of the same patient is available.
2-5-7. Loading data stored on the HDD or external media
<Operation method>
(1) Press F12 key (Load (Continuous) of the menu) while the VCM is lit in orange.
→ The Load dialog box appears.
(2) Load the data with the same procedure of Section 2-4-4. “Reading image data in the VCM”.
2-48
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-6.Stress Echo Examination (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)
2-6. Stress Echo Examination (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)

A stress echo examination is an examination in which the heart is subjected to a load by the use of drugs, for exam-
ple, in order to check for abnormalities. It involves acquiring images before and after the application of the load,
displaying the images alongside each other, synchronizing the heartbeats and performing loop playback.
This permits periodic image evaluation.
2-6-1. Preparations for a stress echo examination
2-6-1-1. Functions for a stress echo examination

The main functions used in a stress echo examination are registered in the custom switches on the keyboard.
[Remark]
Change the Application to Stress Echo on the Preset Set-up Menu page of preset and set the Menu which is used in
the Stress Echo examination to VCM menu. For detail, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
2-6-1-2. Setting a protocol

In the SSD-4000, four protocols are available for performing a stress echo examination.
Also, the user can customize a protocol. You must be sure to select a protocol before starting the examination.
Protocol (Stage) View (Cyclically in the sequence Top left → Top right → Bottom left → Bottom right)
1.Exercises,2Phases
Pre- Exercises PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Post- Exercises PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
2.Exercises,4Phases
Pre- Exercises PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Peak- Exercises PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Post- Exercises PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Recovery PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
3.Pharmacologic,BLPR
Baseline PLAX → PSAX → 4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Low dose PLAX → PSAX → 4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Peak dose PLAX → PSAX → 4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Recovery PLAX → PSAX → 4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
4.Pharmacologic,BLMP
Baseline PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Low dose PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Mid dose PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
Peak dose PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH (Cyclically)
5.User (Max 32 characters)
Max 4 stages (max 32 characters)Max 4 views (max 16 characters)
2-49
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<How to change a protocol>

(1) Turn ON the VCM switch, and select Protocol Select from the menu.
→ Protocol Select is displayed.
(2) Using rotary encoder 2 and the menu select switch, set the item corresponding to the
protocol that you wish to use.
[Remark]
You can also set a built-in protocol or change changing the setting of a User Protocol using
a preset. By setting a protocol in advance, you can omit setting work. For details, refer to the
section on presets.
[Remark]
The four protocols other than User are built into the equipment. You cannot change or add
Stage or View items.
When you select User, a customized protocol is activated.
[Remark]
Note that if you change the protocol while carrying out an examination in the stress mode, the automatically acquired
data will be deleted.
<How to customize a protocol>
Note
The data, name, and so on, set in a user protocol differs for each equipment, so you cannot display a stored
image in a time system with the Load (Stress) in the menu. In this case, read each image using Load in the
VCM menu.
(1) Turn ON the VCM switch, and select User Protocol from the menu.
→ The User Protocol editing dialog box appears.
2-50
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(2) Using the trackball and the SET switch, enter the protocol name, stage name (max 8 stages) and view name
(max 4 views) from the keyboard.
(3) After creating a protocol, select the Exit button.

→ The image registered is displayed.
2-6-1-3. Setting for a saving location

Before starting an examination, select a saving location either in HDD or Disk from the Store (Stress Echo) item of
Common Preset VCM page of the preset.
When HDD is selected, data are saved only in the hard disk of the equipment. If Disk is selected, data are saved both
in the hard disk and MO.
A MO has to have an enough capacity for saving before being selected as a Disk.
[Remark]
The amount of data contained in an image differs depending upon the adjustment of the VCM and the image storage
setting. The recommended setting for acquiring an image that occupies relatively small memory space is set out
below.
(1) Set ECG Cycle to Next Cycle or Current Cycle.

→ The smaller the number of heartbeats acquired, the smaller is the amount of data occupied by the image.
If you set multiple heartbeats and as a result the memory capacity of the VCM is exceeded, an image
consisting of one heartbeat will be automatically retained.
(2) Set Color Mode to Always B/W.

→ If color data is not needed in the image to be acquired, the amount of data that it contains can be reduced.
(3) Set Frame Rate (VCM) to Max 30 Hz.

→ If you limit the maximum number of images that can be simultaneously acquired to the VCM to 30 Hz,
the amount of data contained in the images will be reduced. In this case, you can operate the main
equipment at max 60 Hz, and limit only the images to be acquired to the VCM to max 30 Hz.
(4) Store an image in the RLE compression format.

→ If you use RLE compression as the storage format for an image, the amount of data that the image
contains will be reduced. In this case, a certain amount of time will be required from the end of the
examination until the image data is stored. This function can be changed using a preset.
2-51
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-6-2. Starting a stress echo examination

The following is an explanation before saving data in MO after a stress echo check.
When saving data to a hard disk, there is no need to have a MO drive and a MO disk.
First, attach the ECG leads to the patient, and adjust the ECG so that the R wave is detected satisfactorily.
(1) Press the NEW PATIENT switch, and enter patient data such as the ID.
[Remark]
Unless you enter an ID, the stress echo examination will not take place.
(2) Insert an MO disk that has sufficient capacity to store the observed image in the MO drive.
(4) Select Stress Mode in the menu to turn On the stress mode.
→ The format of the image during the stress echo examination will change to Quad Small, and the first
stage name will appear on the VCM screen.
Stage name Memory segment mark
View name
VCM screen B mode screen on the main equipment
[Remark]
When the Stress Mode is On, you cannot change the format by using the Format menu.
[Remark]
During the examination, do not change the mode to one other than the B mode because this may cause the acquired
image to be deleted.
(5) Turn OFF the VCM switch to return to the main equipment B mode screen.
The description for the subsequent procedure is based on the main equipment B mode screen during the stress mode
operation. When checking an acquired image, turn ON the VCM switch and check the VCM image. You can return
to the main equipment B mode screen by turning OFF the VCM switch once again.
(6) Display the pre-load image necessary for stress examination, and press the ACQUIRE switch for each view.
→ As a result of ECG sync acquisition, images corresponding to the specified number of heartbeats are
acquired. To check the acquisition status, turn ON the VCM switch and switch over the VCM screen,
or observe the memory segment marks displayed at top left of the B mode display.
2-52
MN1-1174 Rev.9
[Remark]
When all of the views for one stage are acquired, all of the segment marks at top left of the B mode display become
blank.
Before image acquisition After image acquisition

[Remark]
If you wish to re-acquire an image to the VCM, turn ON the VCM switch to switch over to the VCM screen, then
using the SELECT switch move the blue border to the image that you wish to re-acquire, and press the FREEZE
switch twice. The image that you wish to re-acquire will be deleted from the memory and a real time B mode image
will be displayed. Turn OFF the VCM switch to return to the main equipment B mode screen, then re-acquire an
image using the ACQUIRE switch.
(7) After you have acquired all of the pre-load images, select Store (Stress) from the menu.
→ The stage ends. When the stage ends, the image is first stored in the hard disk in the equipment, and the
image in the VCM is deleted. The stage name on the VCM screen changes to the next stage name.
The ACQUIRE switch does not function while image data is being copied to the hard disk.
[Remark]
It takes a certain amount of time for image data to be transferred to the hard disk. After the pre-load image is
acquired, promptly end the stage. Confirm that when load image for the next stage is acquired, the memory segment
marks are as shown below.
Memory full Preparations completed
(8) Apply a load to the heart and display an image, then press the ACQUIRE switch for each view.
→ The images when stress is applied are progressively acquired. When the stage ends, select Store
(Stress) in the same way as (7).
If the 2Stage protocol is selected, the examination completion processing of step (9) will take place.
(9) After the end of the final stage, select Store (Stress) from the menu.
→ The images are first stored in the hard disk, and then the following message is displayed.
Stress Echo study completed.

It takes time until it is store in the MO disk.
Please Wait.
Subsequently, the message "Store images to Removable disk" is displayed at bottom left of the screen, and all image
data in the hard disk of the main equipment is copied in the MO disk.
[Remark]
While image data is being stored in the MO disk, do not remove the MO disk until the message "Store images to
Removable disk" disappears. Note that this work takes a certain amount of time.
[Remark]
When a hard disk is set for saving data of stress echo in a preset, the saving is complete at the time of data saved to
the hard disk.
2-53
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-6-3. Interrupting a stress echo examination

There are four ways of canceling the stress echo operation during an examination.
(1) Press the New Patient switch.
(2) Select Stress Mode from the menu to turn Off the mode.
(3) Change the ID.
(4) Start the preset.
Performing one of the above will interrupt the stress echo examination.
[Remark]
If you wish to end an examination mid-way, you must enter blank data as far as the last stage and view in order to
store the images to the point where the examination was interrupted. Note that if you interrupt an examination, there
is a possibility that no images will remain.
2-6-4. Displaying a stress echo image

You can display images of a cross-section (view) before and after load application (stage) on the same screen, and
make observations on a 4-screen display. Images that can be displayed in this way are assigned a name consisting
of the study ID on the patient data stored in the followed by "-SE". Regarding images other than these, you cannot
observe the time change using a 4-screen display. In this case, you must first carry out normal VCM loading, and
read each slice individually.
[Remark]
Regarding image data stored in the by User Protocol, the three characters "-SE" are not displayed at the end of the
study ID.
(1) Turn on the VCM switch and select Load (Stress Echo) from the menu.
→ A search dialog appears on the screen.

Selecting a reading location either in MO or HDD here, then input Identification, Patient name, Date and
others.
Selecting the Search button after inputting, you can display the patient data list in the media selected
as shown in the figure hereafter.
2-54
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(2) Pointing the arrow to the study section of the patient on the upper row who is desired to fetch for loading,
then press the SET switch. Among the study ID listing in the middle row, you can select the stress examina-
tion.
Patient name Examination name
Load button
[Remark]
The blue highlight display indicates the selected condition. Be sure to highlight the examination items in blue.
(3) Select the Load button at bottom right of the screen, and load the image data to the VCM.
→ The screen is automatically divided into a 4-part display, and the image of the first view before and after
load is displayed.
(4) Set the Search switch to ON, and roll the trackball in the upward direction.
→ The pre-load and post-load images are synchronized to create a loop.
When you wish to check fine motion of the heart, you can play back the images in slow motion by rolling
the trackball in the downward direction during loop playback.
[Remark]
If you did not acquire a heartbeat, or if an image containing a heartbeat was not input because of an error.
The system can not do synchronous playback in accordance with ECG R wave.
[Remark]
There are four methods of performing synchronous playback.
Long Loop playback is Synchoronized with the image that has the longest image of the four screens.
A short image stops at the last frame in the Loop playback. A short image resumes Loop playback when
a long image is returned to the first frame. The images are played back in a loop at a same seed.
Short Loop playback is Synchoronized with the image that has the shortest image of the four screens.
Other long images play the same time as the short image in the Loop playback.
The rest of the images don't playback. The images are played back in a loop at a same seed.
Align Loop playback is Synchoronized with the image that has the longest image of the four screens.
The playback speed is adjusted so as to eliminate the difference between this image and images with
a short heartbeat.
Free run The data of the four screens is not synchronized, and is played back at different speeds.
2-55
MN1-1174 Rev.9
In the case of Align, depending upon the kind of playback speed of the VCM, the playback speed is sometimes not
synchronized with the length of the heartbeat. In the case of slow motion Align playback, the playback speed of a
short heartbeat is adjusted to conform to the playback speed of a long heartbeat as a reference.
Change the method of playback using Loop Mode in the VCM menu.
(5) Select Load Next from the menu.

→ The pre-load and post-load images are displayed in the next view.
(6) When re-confirming the previous view, select Load Previous from the menu.
→ The previous view is displayed once again
[Remark]
If the image is small, making it difficult to check, set Zoom (VCM) in the menu to On. When you set Zoom to Off
again, the original four screens will be displayed once again.
[Remark]
If multiple stress echo data is selected and image data that is not a stress echo is contained in it, you cannot load it
as a stress echo.
[Remark]
Data, names, and so on, that are set by a user protocol differ with each equipment, so you cannot display a stored
image in a time series using Load (Stress). Read the image using Load of a normal VCM.
2-6-5. Canceling a stress echo display

There are two methods of canceling a stress echo image display.
(1) Change Format of the menu to Full or Split.
(2) Select Load of the menu, and execute the normal (non-stress echo) load.
Cancel a stress echo examination using one of the above methods.
2-56
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7.Stress Echo Examination(Option: EU-9111 is necessary)
2-7. Stress Echo Examination(Option: EU-9111 is necessary)

A Stress Echo is an examination to check abnormalities of a heart with applying a load by physical exercise or
medication.
Qualitative image evaluations are enabled by acquiring images at pre-load or post-load, or by doing a Loop-playback
with displaying laterally in accordance with heartbeat.
The unit is providing two protocols: Template Acquisition which acquires Fixed at all Stages and Continuous
Acquisition which takes in images continuously including Multi Stage.
<Protocol built in as Default>
Protocol Type Protocol Stage View and Taking-in order

Template Acquisition Dobutamine BASE PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
DLow PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
DPeak PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
RECO PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
Continuous Acquisition Exercise BASE PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
PEAK PLAX → PSAX → A4CH → A2CH
[Remark]
The composition and the name of a protocol can be changed in preset.
A protocol can customize for Template Acquisition and Continuous Acquisition independently with every preset.
2-57
MN1-1174 Rev.9
Systolic Loop Systolic Loop Time Format(Quad) Zoom(VCM) Scoring Report Load(Stress Echo)
Store(Stress Echo)
Shuffle
Stress Echo
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 Pause
Break
Insert Delete
STC Control
0
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Back
MENU 1
1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Space
2
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | 3
Tab
[ ]
5
Timer
8
Protocol Lock ; '
12

, . / PgUp
(cm)
VCR REC Home PgDn End

D.D.D. ACQUIRE
Skip View
CURSOR BODY SCAN INVERT HARMONIC

SEARCH USER 1 FOCUS ZOOM ECHO
/B.L.S MARK AREA
Pause Protocol REVIEW USER 2

M/D GAIN
VEL RANGE DEPTH/RANGE STEER
/ROTAT
POWER
FLOW
STORE CLEAR
MEASURE
MENT
B M D PW
CW Priority Cycle
FLOW GAIN
B B B M B D FLOW
Select
SELECT
MARK REF
REC
B GAIN
Stress Acquire
Label Scoring Acquire Data Cancel Rotary Encoder 1

Fig. Operation Panel
MENU
VCM1 Protocol Stress Acquire Pause Protocol Skip View
Timer Acquire Data Cancel Priority Cycle Select Stress Echo Control
VCM2 Load(Stress Echo) Label Shuffle Systolic Loop
Systolic Loop Time Format(Qnad) Zoom(VCM) Store (Stress Echo)
Scoring Scoring Report
2-58
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-1. Preparations before Taking in Images
• Input ECG signal to ECG connecting plug or DC-IN.

• As a backup for examination records, recording with a VCR is recommended.
2-7-2. Operating Examples for taking in Images
2-7-2-1. When a Protocol Type is Template Acquisition
1) Input ID
(1) Press the NEW PATIENT switch.

→ Input the patient information such as an ID, etc.
[Remark]
Unless inputting an ID, you cannot perform a Stress Echo.
2) Starting for taking in an Image
(1) Press the Protocol switch.

→ It turns to a screen for taking in a Stress Echo image.
The remaining number of Study is displayed as an assistant message on the screen lower left.
A beginning Stage name (BASE) and View name (PLAX) are displayed and it becomes a pending state
for taking in an image.
Stage Name
View Name
Remaining
number of pending
Study
[Remark]
When Freeze is set On, no operation starts even the Protocol switch is pressed. The following assistance massage
is displayed, so set Freeze off and then press the Protocol switch again.
Please press <Freeze> button. Then try again.

[Remark]
When ECG Sync is set On, no operation starts even the Protocol switch is pressed. The following assistance mas-
sage is displayed, so set ECG SYNC off and then press the Protocol switch again.
Turn off ECG SYNC. Then try again.
2-59
MN1-1174 Rev.9
[Remark]
When Intermittent Method is set to ECG, no operation starts even the Protocol switch is pressed. The following
assistance massage is displayed, so set Intermittent Method to Time and then press the Protocol switch again.
Change Intermittent Method to Time. Then try again.

[Remark]
While inspecting the Stress Echo, the Intermittent Method settings cannot be changed.
[Remark]
When many image data have been saved in HDD, an error dialog is displayed and the Stress Echo does not operate.
Transfer these images from the Image Browser to an external media, and secure a capacity in HDD.
[Remark]
When data exist in the VCM, the dialog showing the status is displayed.
Then, put a cursor on Store previous data then start Protocol. with the trackball and press the SET switch.
Consequently, the Stress Echo Protocol is started automatically after saving the data.
(When there is no need to save data, select Start Protocol without saving data.)
2-60
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(2) When the first Stage image (PLAX) is displayed, press the Stress Acquire switch.
→ It becomes the screen of Priority Cycle Select and Loop images with 4 heartbeats maximum are
displayed.
Cycle No. 1/4 Cycle No.2/4
Cycle No. 3/4 Cycle No. 4/4
[Remark]
The screen of Priority Cycle Select is a screen used for selecting 1 Cycle for comparison.
Even if no setting of Priority Cycle for taking in image is made, it is feasible to change the setting of Priority Cycle
in Shuffle as long as the whole data are being saved.
[Remark]
The number of heart rates which is taken in at one-time of Stress Acquire is four maximum. There may be cases that
the number of heart rates taking in is different every time, depending on the timing of pressing the Stress Acquire
switch and the setting of Protocol.
[Remark]
When the Acquire Data Cancel switch is pressed, a dialog is displayed.
When OK is pressed, the image data carrying out a Loop on Priority Cycle screen are cancelled and the screen be-
comes a pending status taking in the same View image again.
2-61
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Move a blue frame to the Cycle selected with the trackball, or the Priority Cycle Select switch, and or the
Rotary encoder 1, and then press the Stress Acquire switch again.
→ The image is saved and it becomes a pending status taking in the View (PSAX) next.
[Remark]
At that time, the data has yet to be saved.
If the power supply is turned Off before carrying out the Store Stress Echo, the data taken-in get lost.
[Remark]
If the Acquire Data Cancel switch is pressed, it returns to a Priority Cycle Select screen.
In that case, resetting a Priority Cycle is required.
(4) (Repeating the steps (1) through (3), you can acquire all Views which have been set in the Protocol.
→ An Acquire Complete dialog is displayed.
Move the cursor with the trackball to the following respective

cases; to Store Stress Echo when going to save the data; to
End Protocol when going to finish the operation; and to Go
to Shuffle when going to compare display.
[Remark]
When Store (Stress Echo) is selected, a Store Stress Echo dialog is displayed. Refer to the operating example
Section 2-7-6. “Operating examples of Store (Stress Echo)”.
When End Protocol is selected, a message to finish the Stress Echo without saving the image is displayed.
When Go to Shuffle is selected, it moves to a compare /dis-

play (Shuffle) screen without saving the image.
Refer to the operating example Section 2-7-3. “Operating ex-
amples of Shuffle (Compare display)”.
2-62
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-2-2. When Protocol Type is a Continuous Acquisition

Taking in Stage 1 is the same operation of Template Acquisition.
(1) With taking in the all Views of Stage 1 which were set in the Protocol, press the Stress Acquire switch on
the Priority Cycle Select screen at the last view of Stage 1.
→ Automatically, the taking-in screens of Stage 2 are displayed.
Indicator of
memory capacity
[Remark]
The amount of memory capacity which is able to take in continuously is indicated at the screen lower right.
(2) After being displayed the image subsequent to the load, press the Stress Acquire switch.
→ A continuous taking in is started.
[Remark]
At the time of continuous taking in, it is carried out of the taking-in on a no-name state.
After completing the taking-in, you can identify the View with giving a Label.
[Remark]
During a continuous taking in, a Range cannot be changed.
When changing the Range, carry out it after pausing the taking-in.
2-63
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Again press the Stress Acquire switch.

→ The continuous taking-in is suspended.
(4) Acquire necessary images with repeating the steps (2) to (3).
If the required image acquisition is completed, in order to end the taking-in, press the Priority Cycle Select
switch.
→ When the completion of taking-in is confirmed with displaying a dialog, select OK.
(5) With displaying the Priority Cycle Select screen, you can read through the images taken in with a Loop play-
back.
[Remark]
If a memory residual capacity is used up, the taking-in is stopped automatically.
[Remark]
If you are going to end the Stress Echo with saving the data without Labeling and Shuffle, you can press the Protocol
switch and then an Acquire Complete dialog is displayed.
2-64
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(6) Move a blue framework with the trackball or the Rotary encoder 1 and select a Cycle which is used for comparison
among the Cycles which have been taken in continuously, and then press the Label switch or the SET switch.
→ Then, a Label dialog is displayed.
[Remark]
In a Label dialog, the View selected has a check mark on the View name.
(7) Move the cursor to the View name and press the Label switch or the SET switch.
→ The View name is given to the image being selected with the blue frame and the Label dialog is closed.
(8) With repeating step (7) and after completing the setting of Label for all Views which are set in the Protocol,
press the Stress Acquire switch.
→ An Acquire Complete dialog is displayed.
When saving the data, move the cursor to the Store Stress Echo with the trackball; when finishing
the operation, move the cursor to the End Protocol; and when moving to the compare display, move
the cursor to the Go to Shuffle. Then, select the SET switch in the above respective operations.
[Remark]
When Store (Stress Echo) is selected, a dialog of Store Stress Echo is displayed (Refer to the operating example Sec-
tion 2-7-6. “Operating examples of Store (Stress Echo)”.).
When End Protocol is selected, a message indicating the finish of Stress Echo without saving the image is displayed.
When Go to Shuffle is selected, it is moved to a comparison display (Shuffle) screen without saving the image .
Refer to the operating example Section 2-7-3. “Operating examples of Shuffle (Compare display)”.
2-65
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-2-3. Other Functions

Skip View
When skipping a View set by Protocol, press the Skip View switch.
It becomes a state which takes in the next View every time pressing the Skip View switch.
[Remark]
Since a View skipped cannot be taken in, it becomes a blank display after that.
Pause Protocol
When using Flow and Doppler functions during an examination, press the Pause Protocol switch.
[Remark]
During a Pause Protocol, the functions of Multi Data, Acquire, and Store do not operate.
Label
When switching the name of View during Shuffle, press the Label switch or the SET switch.
Timer Display
When required to displaying the Timer during a taking-in of image, press the Timer switch.
If the Timer is once started for counting, it continues the counting until Off of the Timer or the end of Protocol
regardless of Freeze or Pause Protocol.
2-66
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-3. Operating examples of Shuffle (Compare display)

The images taken in can be indicated by comparison with four screens.
A Shuffle Stage and a Shuffle View can be indicated by comparison between them.
Shuffle Stage : A method indicating the same Views by comparison.

Shuffle View : A method indicating the same Stages by comparison.
[Remark]
A Shuffle View and a Shuffle Stage can be switched with the Shuffle switch.
Shuffle
switch
Shuffle Stage Shuffle View

[Remark]
A blue frame can be moved with the trackball.
When a Protocol is 5 Stages or more on a Shuffle Stage, the pages can be moved with the trackball.
When a Protocol is 5 Views or more on a Shuffle View, the same operation can be applied.
Trackball
Shuffle Stage on Stage 4 Shuffle Stage on Stage 5
[Remark]
When changing the View on Shuffle Stage or changing the Stage on Shuffle View, use the Rotary 1.
2-67
MN1-1174 Rev.9
View 1 View 2
Shuffle Stage
View 4 View 3
Stage 1 Stage 2
Shuffle View
Stage 4 Stage 3
2-68
MN1-1174 Rev.9
1) Changing the Labels for Fixed Cycle during Shuffle
(1) Move a blue frame to an image with which switching is required, and press the Label switch or the SET
switch.
→ A Label dialog is displayed on the screen .
(2) Move the cursor to the View name with the trackball and press the Label switch or the SET switch .
→ A message whether switching is requested is displayed.
(3) Select OK.

→ The Label is changed to the selected View name, and a rearrangement of image display is performed.
2-69
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2) Change of a Priority Cycle for Fixed Cycle during Shuffle
(1) Move a blue frame to a View with which changing Priority Cycle is required and press the Priority Cycle
Select switch.
→ The Cycle shown in the segment is changed every time when the Priority Cycle Select switch is pressed.
The display of Cycle No. is changed.
Cycle No. Cycle No.

2/4 3/4
Priority Cycle
Select switch
3) Setting and Setting Change of the Label and the Priority Cycle for a Multi Cycle during Shuffle
(1) Move a blue frame to the Multi Cycle image with which changing the Label and the Priority Cycle is required
and press the Priority Cycle Select switch.
→ With displaying the data of Multi Cycle in full-screen, you can select a View from the all Multi Cycles
with the trackball or the Rotary recorder 1.
[Remark]
When displaying a Shuffle screen without setting a Label, the Stage screen of Multi Cycle is shown only in the seg-
ment of View 1 until the Label setting is made.
(2) Move a blue frame to the View with which the use for compare display is desired, and press the Label switch
or the SET switch.
→ As a Label dialog is displayed, move the cursor to the View name with the trackball.
2-70
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Press the Label switch or the SET switch.

→ The Label is set on the selected View.
[Remark]
When a change is performed for the view which the Label setting has been already made, a message is displayed.
When OK is selected, the Label is changed to the View name selected and a rearrangement of image displays is
performed.
(4) When completing the change of the Label and the Priority Cycle, press the Priority Cycle Select switch.
→ It returns to a Shuffle screen.
[Remark]
When moving the trackball up-and-down with pressing the SEARCH switch during Shuffle, you can change the
Loop playback rate.
[Remark]
When pressing the SEARCH switch, you can assign a Loop playback rate to the trackball.
When moving a blue frame after pressing the SEARCH switch, press the Stress Echo Control switch.
A trackball is assigned to the movement of the blue frame.
2-71
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-4. Scoring function

It scores the movement of a heart while users are checking the images captured.
2-7-4-1. Schema display
<Operation method>
(1) Move the blue frame to the View that you want to display the Schema, and press the Scoring switch.
→ The Schema dialog box appears on the diagonal line of the blue frame.
Scoring
switch
[Remark]
When the Schema dialog box is displayed, the trackball cannot be used to move the blue frame because it is then in
use to move an arrow for scoring.
If you want to display the Schema dialog box of another View, conduct the following operations.
(1) Press the Scoring switch.
(2) Move the blue frame to the View that you want to display the Schema by using the trackball and the rotary
encoder 1.
(3) Press the Scoring switch again.

→ The Schema dialog box appears on the diagonal line of the blue frame.
2-72
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-4-2. Scoring input operation
<Operation method>Keeping Scoring
(1) Select the Score button of the Schema dialog box.

→ It selects Score (Score color).
(2) Select the cardiac muscle segment of the Schema dialog box.
→ It displays the same color selected the step 1 with the cardiac segment of the Schema.
All Normal : Scores Normal for all segments not yet scoring in the Schema displayed.
Scoring Report : Displays a scoring report.
Close : Closes the Schema dialog box.
[Remark]
The eight Schemas of ALL (Bulls eye), PLAX, PSMV, PSPM, PSAP, A4CH, A2CH, ALAX are stored at the time
of shipment.
The device displays the Schema according to the name of the View of the images captured, but it can be changed to
ALL.
2-73
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-5. Scoring Report

There are two types of the scoring reports; the screen displaying all scoring results (Chart = Wall Motion Score) and
the screen displaying the Schema (Schema).
Pressing the Scoring Report switch displays the report in the formant selected in the Report Display Type of the pre-
set (it can be selected from Chart, Shuffle View, Shuffle Stage). The button located on the bottom of the report screen
switchs screens. When closing the display of the report, press the Scoring Report switch or Exit.
Scoring Report
switch Scoring Report
or switch
Exit or
Exit
Chart display
Shuffle Stage
Chart Shuffle View Chart
Shuffle Stage
Shuffle View
Shuffle Stagedisplay Shuffle View display
[Remark]
While displaying the Schema dialog box, pressing the Scoring Report switch can display the scoring report.
However, the Schema dialog box is not displayed when the scoring report closes.
2-74
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-6. Operating examples of Store (Stress Echo)

This function enables you to save the Stress Echo image data to HDD or an external media.
The saving to an external medium such as a CD-R and MO, etc. is carried out in the format based on the DICOM standard.
[Remark]
Does not save the Priority cycle data and the all data of the same Study in the CD-R Buffer simultaneously.
(1) Select the Store Stress Echo switch in an Acquire Complete Dialog.
(Or press the Store (Stress Echo) switch during Shuffle).
→ A Store Stress Echo dialog is displayed.
(2) Move the cursor to the media button which is required to save in a Store Stress Echo dialog with the trackball,
and press the SET switch.
→ The media is set up.
(3) When going to save all data, move the cursor to the Store all data, then to end Protocol. in the Store Stress
Echo dialog with the trackball, and press the SET switch.
( Only when saving the data set in Priority Cycle, select the Store Priority cycles only, then end Protocol.
in the Store Stress Echo dialog.)
→ The data storage starts.
[Remark]
Store All can carry out only to HDD.
[Remark]
The time required for saving data varies depending on the volume of data and the type of media, etc.
[Remark]
If the End Protocol of a Store Stress Echo Dialog is selected, you can finish the Stress Echo Protocol without saving
the data.
If the Cancel of a Store Stress Echo dialog is selected, it is returned to the state before the display of the Store Stress
Echo dialog.
[Remark]
If the Pause Protocol switch (or VCM switch) is pressed during Store, it turns to a state of Pause Protocol and you
can use functions except the Acquire on Multi data.
(4) The data saving completes.

→ The Stress Echo Protocol finishes automatically.
2-75
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2-7-7. Load(Stress Echo)

With the Load (Stress Echo) function, the Stress Echo Data saved in HDD or an external media can be displayed in
Shuffle.
Note
When carrying out Shuffle from Load (Stress Echo), be sure to assign the Protocol switch (or the Store
(Stress Echo) switch) on the panel switch (or menu).
After carrying out a Load (Stress Echo), you cannot escape from the Shuffle operation until the power supply
is turned off.
(1) With turning the VCM switch ON, select the Load (Stress Echo).
→ A search dialog is displayed on the screen.
2-76
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(2) Set the search contents in the search dialog with the trackball, the SET switch, and the Keyboard Input.
After the setup, select the Search.
→ Patient data list is displayed.
(3) Put the cursor on the Studies portion of Patient Name Study which is desired to load from the -Patient- on the
upper part row of a patient data list, and press the SET switch.
Select Series which are desired to Load from the list displayed in the -Study ID - on the middle part row.
[Remark]
The display in blue highlighted shows a selective state.
Be sure to display in blue highlighted for those items to be examined.
2-77
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(4) Put the cursor to the Load in the Dialog with the trackball, and press the SET switch.
→ Shuffle is displayed.
(5) Press the Protocol switch. (or select the Store Stress Echo.)
→ A Store Stress Echo dialog is displayed.
Refer to the operating example Section 2-7-6. “Operating examples of Store (Stress Echo)”.
(6) Put the cursor to the End Protocol of the Store Stress Echo dialog with the trackball, and press the SET
switch.
→ Finishes the Stress Echo Protocol.
[Remark]
After Loading, it can be stored from the Store Stress Echo dialog.
<Meaning of Abbreviation>
1) Protocol
Preset Option Meaning

Exercise Exercise stress echocardiography
Maximal Maximal stress echocardiography
Submaximal Submaximal stress echocardiography
Treadmill exercise Treadmill exercise stress echocardiography
Bruce treadmill Bruce treadmill stress echocardiography
Modified Bruce treadmill Modified Bruce treadmill stress echocardiography
Naughton treadmill Naughton treadmill stress echocardiography
Bicycle exercise Bicycle exercise stress echocardiography
Administered drug Echocardiography with administered drug stress
Dobutamine Dobutamine stress echocardiography
High dose dobutamine High dose dobutamine stress echocardiography
Low dose dobutamine Low dose dobutamine stress echocardiography
Arbutamine Arbutamine stress echocardiography
Dipyridamole Dipyridamole stress echocardiography
2-78
MN1-1174 Rev.9
2) Stage
Option of Preset and Label Display Meaning

STRESS Image acquisition during stress procedure
BASE Image acquisition at baseline
PRE Pre-stress image acquisition
MID Mid-stress image acquisition
PEAK Peak-stress image acquisition
RECO Image acquisition during recovery
POST Image acquisition after drug administration
DUSR Image acquisition at user-defined dobutamine dose
DLow Image acquisition at low-dose dobutamine
DMid Image acquisition at mid-dose dobutamine
DPeak Image acquisition at peak dose dobutamine
05ga Image acquisition at dobutamine 5 mcg/kg/min
40gaA Image at dobutamine 40 mcg/kg/min plus atropine
50gaA Image acquisition at dobutamine 50 mcg/kg/min plus atropine
ABPK Image acquisition at peak Arbutamine dose
DPPK Image acquisition at peak dipyridamole
PNIT Image acquisition after nitroglycerin
PAMN Image acquisition after amyl nitrite
PADE Image acquisition after adenosine
2-79
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3) View
Option of Preset and Label Display Meaning

A2CH Apical two chamber
A4CH Apical four chamber
ALAX Apical long axis
PLAX Parasternal long axis
PSAX Parasternal short axis
PSAV Parasternal short axis at the aoritc valve level
PSMC Parasternal short axis at the level of the mitral chords
PSMV Parasternal short axis at the Mitral Valve level
PSPM Parasternal short axis at the Papillary Muscle level
RVIT Right Ventricular Inflow Tract View
RVOT Right Ventricular Outflow Tract View
SCLX Subcostal long axis
SCSX Subcostal short axis
SSLX Suprasternal long axis
SSSX Suprasternal short axis
PSAP Parasternal short axis at the Apex level
2-80
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3-1.Recording to a printer
3. RECORDING IMAGES
Follow the procedures in “3. Installation Method” of the Safety Instruction Manual to install a recording device.
3-1. Recording to a printer

(1) Specify the recording device using the preset.
→ For details, refer to Section 6. “PRESET”.
(2) Freeze the image, and press the PRINT switch.

→ Gamma correction is applied, and the image is printed.
[Remark]
If the recording device set in the preset is different to the recording device actually connected, the image will not be
recorded correctly.
[Remark]
You cannot perform a recording operation while an image is being recorded.
3-2. Recording and playing back images on a VCR
3-2-1. When operating it by the main part side of VCR
3-2-1-1. Recording
(1) Press the REC switch on the VCR.

→ Recording starts.
(2) Press the STOP switch on the VCR.

→ Recording stops.

3-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3-2.Recording and playing back images on a VCR
3-2-1-2. Playback
(1) Press the EXT switch on the operation panel.

→ The screen goes into a status that enables the VCR screen to be displayed.
(2) Press the PLAY switch on the VCR.

→ The recorded images are displayed on the monitor.
[Remark]
Pressing the FF switch on the VCR fast-forwards the VCR images.
Pressing the REW switch on the VCR rewinds the VCR images.
(3) Press the STOP switch of the VCR.

→ The VCR stops and nothing appears on the screen.

→ The screen switches over to the image on the SSD-4000 side.
3-2-2. Operations using the panel switches on the SSD-4000 side

By connecting the HS-MD3000 made by MITSUBISHI using the optional control cable (L-CABLE-296), you can
control the VCR remotely from the operation panel.
3-2-2-1. Recording
(1) Press the REC switch on the operation panel.

→ Recording starts.
(2) Press the REC switch on the operation panel.

→ Recording pauses.
3-2-2-2. Playback

→ The screen goes into a status that enables the VCR images to be displayed.
(2) Press the switch (SCAN AREA) on the operation panel.

→ The VCR images appear on the screen.
(3) Press the switch (FOCUS) on the operation panel.

→ The VCR images stop.

→ The screen switches over to the image on the SSD-4000 side.
3-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3-2.Recording and playing back images on a VCR
3-2-2-3. Search
(1) During VCR playback, roll the trackball to the right.

Alternatively, press the switch (ZOOM) on the operation panel.
→ The VCR images are searched in the fast forward direction.
[Remark]
You can perform a search in the rewind direction by either rolling the trackball to the left or pressing the switch
(BODY MARK) on the operation panel during VCR playback.
[Remark]
You can change the search speed by turning rotary encoder 1 during the search operation.
[Remark]
If you roll the trackball in the downward direction during a search, the VCR will go into a playback condition.
(2) When the target image appears, roll the trackball in the upward direction.
Alternatively, press the switch (blank) on the operation panel.
→ The images being searched pause.
[Remark]
If you roll the trackball in the downward direction when the VCR is in a paused condition, the search will resume.
(3) Press the switch (SCAN AREA) on the operation panel.

→ The pause condition is canceled, and the VCR images are played back.
Operation of trackball during a search

PAUSE
REW search Trackball FF search
PLAY
3-3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
3-3.Printing a VCR Image
3-3. Printing a VCR Image

(1) While the VCR is playing back images, press the FREEZE switch.
→ Image playback pauses.
(2) Press the PRINT switch.

→ The frozen image is printed.
3-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
4-1.Method of Displaying Physiological Signals
4. PHYSIOLOGICAL SIGNALS
(Option: When connected to the PEU-4000)
Follow the procedures in “3. Installation Method” of the Safety Instruction to install a physiological signal unit.
Caution
Do not use a defibrillator when using a physiological signal unit because this may cause the unit to break
down.
4-1. Method of Displaying Physiological Signals

(1) Connect ECG electrodes, PCG microphone and PULSE transducer to the patient.
[Remark]
The ECG lead method is the second limb lead method, so connect the cords as shown below.
ECG cable Red (R) Green (F) Black (RF)

Connection point Right hand Left foot Right foot
(2) Set ECG Display/ PCG Display / Pulse Display in the menu to On.
→ An ECG waveform or PCG waveform is displayed on the B mode image, and an ECG waveform, PCG
waveform or PULSE waveform is displayed on the B, M or D mode image.
(3) Adjust the display position using the POSITION knob (inner knob) on the physiological operation panel on
the left side of the main equipment.
[Remark]
Each of the ECG, PCG and PULSE control knobs is of a double construction. The inner knob is the POSITION
knob, and the outer knob is the SENSITIVITY knob.
[Remark]
If the M mode image and ECG image overlap each other, making them difficult to see, you can erase part of the
M mode image by using the echo erase function in the menu.
(4) Adjust the sensitivity using the SENSITIVITY knob (outer knob) .
(5) When the ECG wave is displayed, the equipment detects the R wave and computes the heart rate.
→ The heart rate is displayed as HR*** on the screen. (Display range: HR 30-200)
If the heart rate exceeds the display range, it is displayed as HR***.
[Remark]
If the R wave is not detected for at least 5 seconds, an assist message appears.
DETECTION ERROR
R-wave of ECG is not detected
Check whether or not the ECG electrodes are connected correctly to the patient.
(6) Set ECG Display on the menu to Off.

→ The display of the physiological signal waveform ends.
4-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
4-2.ECG Sync Display
4-2. ECG Sync Display

ECG sync display (SYNC function) is a function that displays the part of an image through which the ECG sync
mark passes.
You can obtain an image of any desired time phase while observing the time phase of the ECG waveform.
When you use the SYNC function, please assign ECG SYNC to a menu with the preset function beforehand.
(1) When an ECG waveform is displayed and it is in a real-time (unfrozen) condition, select ECG SYNC from
the menu to turn ON the ECG sync.
→ A SYNC mark appears on the ECG waveform, and the DELAY time from the R wave is displayed on
the screen. You can set the delay time in 50 ms steps.
[Remark]
In order to set the delay time, you must assign R-Delay Time to the menu.
DELAY time
+0.00
ECG signal
SYNC mark
Fig. ECG sync display
(2) Select R-Delay Time from the menu, and set the sync time.
[Remark]
If the sync period exceeds the set limit, the following assistance message will flash at bottom left of the screen.
RANGE LIMIT
Selection is not available
(3) Set ECG SYNCon the menu to Off.

→ The ECG sync display ends.
[Remark]
If the R wave is not detected for at least 5 seconds, the following assistance message will flash at bottom left of the
screen.
DETECTION ERROR
R-wave of ECG is not detected
Check to see whether or not the ECG electrodes are connected correctly to the patient.
B/SYNC Mode
In this mode, a normal B mode image is displayed on the left side of the screen, and a SYNC image is displayed on
the right side.
[Remark]
In order to use the B/SYNC Mode, it is necessary to assign it to the menu.
4-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-1.Menu setting operations
5. MENU
5-1. Menu setting operations
The menu function displays function conditions and image conditions that cannot be used directly from the operation
panel, in a menu format on the monitor screen, to enable you to make the necessary condition settings.
(Switches used for menu setting operations)
POW ER DISK CAPS LOCK FUNCTION

STC
MENU switch
Break
0
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Back MENU 1
1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Space
2
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | 3
Tab
[ ]
5
Caps A S D F G H J K L : " 8
Lock
; '
12 MENU
, . / PgUp
(cm)

Home PgDn End
D.D.D. ACQUIRE
SEARCH USER 1
CURSOR
/B.L.S
FOCUS
BODY
MARK
SCAN
AREA
ZOOM
INVERT HARMONIC
ECHO
Rotary encoder 2
PW
B M D
MEASURE CW
STORE CLEAR
MENT
FLOW GAIN
B B B M B D FLOW
SELECT
MARK REF
REC
B GAIN
MENU select switch
Fig. Panel
MENU switch : Displays the main menu.
Rotary encoder 2 : Used to select menu items.
MENU select switch : Used to select the items to be set.

5-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-2.Setting Procedure
5-2. Setting Procedure

(1) Press the MENU switch or turn rotary encoder 2.
→ A menu appears on the screen.
[Remark]
You can make a setting with a preset to prevent the menu from being
displayed when rotary encoder 2 is turned. Menu title
(2) With the menu title selected, press the menu select switch
→ The menu page switches over, so display the target page.

Menu
You can move

the displayed
position of the
menu.
(3) Select the menu item whose setting you wish to change using
rotary encoder 2.
→ A setting box appears alongside the selected menu item.
[Remark]
You cannot select a menu item that cannot be set.
(4) Press the menu select switch

→ The setting changes.

→ The menu setting process is completed.
[Remark]
You can change the displayed positions of the items in the menu, or not
display them, using the preset function.
Also, you can assign all of the menu items to the custom switches on the
panel.
5-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Sub-menus>
(1) Press the MENU switch, or turn rotary encoder 2.

→ A menu appears on the screen.
(2) Select the menu item indicated by the mark alongside the function name using rotary encoder 2, and
press the menu select switch.
→ The menu display disappears, and a sub-menu window appears.
The selection item that is checked is the currently set item.
[Remark]
Some sub-menus display a setting box to enable settings to be made.
Carry out setting work in the same way as for an ordinary menu.
(3) Select an item using rotary encoder 2, and press the right menu select switch.
→ The set item is checked.
(4) Upon completion of setting work, press the left menu select switch, or select
Exit and press the right menu select switch.
→ The sub-menu is ended, and the menu appears.
[Remark]
The sub-menu used to display and set the setting box closes when the right menu select
switch is pressed after Exit is selected.
<Moving a sub-menu>
(1) Select Location in the sub-menu, and press the right menu select switch.
→ You can move the displayed position of the sub-menu with the trackball.
(2) After moving the displayed position, press the SET switch.
→ The displayed position is finalized.
5-3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
The menu is designed so as to display the optimum function in each mode with maximum priority. The table below
shows the correspondence between the modes and menu pages.
Current mode Priority page Operable page

B B B, Other
2B B B, Other
B/M M M, B, Other
B/M (M when frozen) B B, M, Other
M M M, Other
B/D D D, B, Other
B/D (D when frozen) B B, D, Other
D D D, Other
BF Flow Flow, B, Other
BF/MF Flow Flow, M, B, Other
BF/MF (MF when frozen) Flow Flow, B, M, Other
MF Flow Flow, M, Other
BF/D D D, Flow, B, Other
BF/D (D when frozen) Flow Flow, B, D, Other
BP Power Power, B, Other
BP/MP Power Power, M, B, Other
BP/MP (MP when frozen) Power Power, B, M, Other
MP Power Power, M, Other
BP/D D D, Power, B, Other
BP/P (D when frozen) Power Power, B, D, Other
B-TDIF TDI-F TDI-F, B, Other
B-TDIF/M-TDIF TDI-F TDI-F, M, B, Other
B-TDIF/M-TDIF (M-TDIF when frozen) TDI-F TDI-F, B, M, Other
M-TDIF TDI-F TDI-F, M, Other
M-TDIF/D-TDIF TDI-D TDI-D, TDI-F, B, Other
M-TDIF/D-TDIF (D-TDIF when frozen) TDI-F TDI-F, B, TDI-D, Other
B-TDIP TDI-P TDI-P, B, Other
B-TDIP/M-TDIP TDI-P TDI-P, M, B, Other
B-TDIP/M-TDIP (M-TDIP when frozen) TDI-P TDI-P, B, M, Other
M-TDIP TDI-P TDI-P, M, Other
B-TDIP/D-TDI TDI-D TDI-D, TDI-P, B, Other
B-TDIP/D-TDI (D-TDI when frozen) TDI-P TDI-P, B, TDI-D, Other
D-TDI TDI-D TDI-D, Other
B (FAM Cursor on active) FAM FAM, B, Other
B/M (FAM Cursor on active) FAM FAM, B, Other
M (FAM Cursor on active, on freeze) FAM FAM, Freeze, Other
VCM (when VCM switch ON) VCM VCM, Other
5-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3. B mode menu
5-3-1. AGC (B)

This item enables you to enhance the boundary between tissues.
You can change the AGC in 16 steps from 0 to 15.
5-3-2. Angle Gain

This function corrects the gain at an arbitrary position in the direction of the scanning lines.
[Remark]
This function operates only with an electronic sector probe. The setting will be retained until you either press the
NEW PATIENT switch, or change the preset.
Moving the slider in the upward direction increases the gain, and moving it downward reduces the gain.
Reset : Displays a straight line at the center.
5-3-3. Beam Processing

This function switches over the number of beams received in order to improve the frame rate.
Multi : Scanning takes place using multiple received beams.

Single : Scanning takes place using the standard number of scanning lines.
5-5
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-4. Brachytherapy
This function displays brachytherapy guide lines, and performs brachytherapy.
Mode
Off : Turns off the brachytherapy display
on the screen.
Grid : Displays a coordinate display
graphic display and a memory posi-
tion list, and registers the coordi-
nate position.
Target : Displays the coordinate position
mark.
Grid Display Type

Select a coordinate display method from
A, B and C.
Add
Additionally registers a coordinate number.
Delete
Deletes a registered coordinate number.
Table Location
Moves the memory position list.
[Remark]
This function operates only when the UST-672-5/7.5 trans-rectum probe is connected.
[Remark]
This function operates only in the B mode when the horizontal width is displayed normally.
[Remark]
When performing brachytherapy, it is necessary to obtain a guide and a template.
5-6
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-5. Focus (B)

This function focuses the ultrasound beam, resulting in a clearer image. It enables you to change the focus points
used when the ultrasound beam is emitted.
A B mode image has 8 transmission points when an electronic sector probe is used. You can set the focus at up to 4
of these points.
Auto 1P : Sets 1 focus point near the center of the image.

Auto 2P (@) : Sets 1 fixed point at the top of the image and 1 movable point
at the center of the image.
Auto 2P : Sets 2 average focus points for the entire image.
Auto 3P : Sets the focus at 3 points on the image.
Manual : You can set arbitrary focus points. However, when using Man-
ual Focus (B), the focusing will not be corrected automatically
if the focus points are outside the display range.
5-3-6. Frame CORRE (B)

This function correlates adjacent frames in order to obtain a smooth image.
When observing fast motion, such as that of the heart, set the correlation on the low side.
Frame CORRE can be changed in 16 steps.
Set Frame CORRE to one of 16 steps between 0 and 15.
5-3-7. Frame CORRE LEV.

This function is used to select the processing method for frame correlation.
Low : Applies correlation only to parts of the image that are signifi-
cantly different to those of the previous frame. This item is
suitable for observing images of the circulatory organs, for ex-
ample.
Medium 1 : Applies low-medium correlation to the previous frame.
Medium 2 : Applies high-medium correlation to the previous frame.
High : Applies correlation to all parts of the image including parts that
are not significantly different to those of the previous frame.
This item is suitable for observing the abdominal region.
5-7
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-8. Frame CORRE Type

Selects the operation mode of the frame correlation function.
Auto : The correlation is set according to the frame rate.

Manual : Fixes the number of images to which frame correlation is applied. The degree of correlation
changes with the frame rate.
5-3-9. FTC (B)

This function enhances the contours of a B mode image.
Off : The contours of the B mode image are not enhanced.

On : The contours of the B mode image are enhanced.
5-3-10. Guide Line Setting

This function displays an arrow alongside the needle guide line to enable the depth to the target to be measured, and
also changes the angle of the needle guide line.
Measure
Off : Turns Off the depth display.
On : Enables the depth to the target
to be measured and displayed with the trackball.
Angle Select
Selects the needle guide line to be displayed if there
are a number of puncture guide lines.
[Remark]
You can automatically display needle guide line by activating this function, even if Puncture Guide Line is Off.
[Remark]
The needle guide line will not disappear even if the trackball is used for another function (focusing, for example)
while the depth is displayed. Also, the position of the arrow indicating the depth display will not change. (This does
not apply when the mode is changed, however.)
The depth display arrow is retained until you select Guide Line Setting from the menu once again and set Measure
to Off.
[Remark]
The depth display numbers are rough values for reference. Use them after first checking the error with respect to the
distance to the tip of the puncture needle in a water tank, for example.
5-8
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-11. Harmonic Echo

This function performs image processing using the second harmonic waves reflected from the tissue, which are twice
the frequency of the transmitted signal, enabling a clear image that is relatively free from side lobes and other arti-
facts to be obtained.
Off : The received frequency is not twice the transmission frequency.

On : The received frequency is twice the transmission frequency.
5-3-12. Horizontal SMOOTH (B)

Applying correlation between lines of the ultrasound beam is called Horizontal Smoothing.
By applying correlation between lines, the image becomes smooth in the horizontal direction.
Off : Correlation is not applied.

Low : A low degree of correlation between lines is set.
High : A high degree of correlation between lines is set.
5-3-13. Image Rotation (B)

This function rotates a displayed B mode image through 90°. The marks associated with the image (direction marks,
cursor, etc.) rotate together with the image.
You can rotate an image through 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°.
5-3-14. Line Density (B)

The scanning line density is called Line Density.
If the line density is high, good resolution is obtained. Conversely, if the line density is low, the frame rate is im-
proved.
Low : Sets the line density to a low value.

MED : Sets the line density to a medium value.
High : Sets the line density to a high value.
5-9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-15. Loop Mode (2B)

This item is used when performing loop playback in the 2B mode to set which of the 2B screens to use as a reference
for performing loop playback.
Short : Playback takes place to the final frame only in the case of images that consist of a small number of
frames. If an image consists of a large number of frames, playback returns to the first frame without
going as far as the final frame.
Long : Playback takes place to the final frame of images that consist of a large number of frames. If an image
consists of only a small number of frames, the final frame (frozen screen) remains displayed after play-
back has ended.
5-3-16. Manual Focus (B)
This function enables you to select the position at which to set the focus points (s)
when Manual of Focus (B) is selected.
You can set the focus to a maximum of four steps between F1 and F8.
[Remark]
You can change to Manual by activating this function, even if Focus (B) is in the Auto
status.
[Remark]
You cannot set all of the focus points to OFF. One focus point always remains set.
5-3-17. OMNI Plane

This function moves the angle of the transducer in the probe to enable a slice image to be displayed at any desired
angle.
You can set the angle in 5° steps within the range −45° — 0° — 45°.
[Remark]
The ASU-1003 trans vaginal electronic convex sector scanner and the optional EU-9112 are necessary.
5-10
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-18. Pixel Smoothing (B)

Emphasizes the graininess of the echo, or smoothen it.
Off : Emphasizes the grain texture of the echo. (Mainly for cardiac applications)
On : Smoothen the grain texture of the echo. (Mainly for the abdominal region)
5-3-19. Smoothing (B)

In the same depth, a correlation is established in scanning direction so that images turn out smooth.
When strengthening linkages, set the setting rather high.
You can change the Smoothing (B) in 8 steps from 1 to 8.
5-3-20. PRF Limit

When the examination range is narrow, the frame rate is automatically limited to prevent multiple echoes from ap-
pearing. This PRF Limit function removes this limit. It is particularly useful for when examining the circulatory or-
gans.
Off : The PRF scans at the highest frame rate for the display depth used.
On : Maintains the PRF constant even if the display depth is increased, in order to prevent multiple echoes.
5-3-21. Puncture Guide Line

This function enables you to display a needle guide line on the screen, in order to puncture a part of the body while
observing a B mode image.
The needle guide line is displayed using dots. The dot separation is either 0.5cm or 1.0cm depending upon the dis-
play depth.
The 0.5cm or 1.0cm separation also changes depending upon the display depth and the zoom magnification.
If the display direction of the image is reversed, the puncture guide line is also reversed.
Off : A needle guide line is not displayed.

On : A needle guide line is displayed.
[Remark]
This function operates regardless of whether the freeze function is ON or OFF.
5-11
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-3.B mode menu
5-3-22. Relief (B)

This function enhances the contours of a B mode image.
Off : The contours are not enhanced.

Low : The contours are enhanced to a small degree.
MED : The contours are enhanced to a medium degree.
High : The contours are enhanced to a high degree.
5-12
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-4.M mode menu
5-4. M mode menu
5-4-1. AGC (M)

This item enables you to enhance the boundary between tissues.
You can change the AGC in 16 steps from 0 to 15.
5-4-2. Echo Erase

The M mode image and physiological image are displayed in the same area, so the physiological signal is sometimes
difficult to see.
The function that progressively erases the M mode image from the bottom so as to make the physiological signal
easy to see is called Echo Erase.
Echo Erase can be changed through 20 steps, between 0 and 19.
5-4-3. Focus (M)

An M mode image has 8 focus points when an electronic probe is used. You can set the focus at only 1 of these
points.
Auto : Sets 1 focus point near the center of the image.
Manual : You can set arbitrary focus point, however, the focus point is not automat-
ically corrected if they move outside the display range.
[Remark]
5-4-4. FTC (M)

This function enhances the contours of an M mode image.
Off : The contours of the M mode image are not enhanced.

On : The contours of the M mode image are enhanced.
5-13
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-4.M mode menu
5-4-5. Manual Focus (M)

This function enables you to select the position at which to set the focus point when Manual of Focus (M) is selected.
You can set the focus to one step between F1 and F8.
[Remark]
You can change to Manual by activating this function, even if Focus (M) is in the Auto
status.
[Remark]
5-4-6. Relief (M)

This function enhances the contours of an M mode image.
Off : The contours are not enhanced.

Low : The contours are enhanced to a small degree.
MED : The contours are enhanced to a medium degree.
High : The contours are enhanced to a high degree.
[Remark]
You can change the Relief (M) setting in the M mode when FTC is applied to an M mode image, however in this
case the image does not change.
When FTC is canceled, an image that corresponds to the set level is displayed.
5-4-7. Sweep Speed (M)

This function sets the sweep speed when an M mode image is displayed. You can set the sweep time from the right
edge of the screen to the left edge.
For the M mode image, M should be 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 sec/screen.

In the case of a B/M mode display, the sweep time becomes about 2/3 that of an M mode display.
The marks are displayed from the right to the left on M mode image every 0.5 seconds.
The number of the displayed marks depends on the sweep speed.
However, in the case of a real-time display, this mark appears only at the top and bottom ends of the image.
When the image is frozen, the mark appears at fixed intervals from the top end to the bottom end.
5-14
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-5.D mode/TDI-D menu
5-5. D mode/TDI-D menu
5-5-1. Color Map (D)

This function adds color to D mode images in order to obtain an image that is easy to see.
Gray : Normal brightness characteristics

A : Blue and orange brightness characteristics
B : Blue brightness characteristics
C : Blue brightness characteristics that are slightly weaker than those of B
D : Orange brightness characteristics
5-5-2. Compression Curve (D)

This function switches over the brightness characteristics of the Doppler pattern. Weak signal levels are suppressed,
resulting in a clear Doppler pattern.
You can set this function to one of 8 steps between 0 and 7.
5-5-3. Filter Control (D)

This function removes low frequency, high level noise that is generated by the motion of the heart wall, for example.
It is used when high frequency components of blood flow are suppressed, preventing a clear image from being
displayed.
Auto : Controls noise using a filter value that corresponds to the flow velocity range.
Manual : Controls noise using a fixed filter value.
If “AUTO” is selected using Filter Control, a filter value that is optimum for the flow velocity range is automatically
set.
In the Auto mode, the filter value is set to one of 12 steps. In the Manual mode, you can set the filter value to one of
six steps, 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 400 Hz, 800 Hz and 1600 Hz.
5-15
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-5-4. Focus (D)

A D mode image has 8 focus points when an electronic probe is used. You can set the focus at only 1 of these points.
Auto : Sets the focus at only 1 point near the center of the sample volume.
5-5-5. Image Polarity (D)

This function displays a D mode image with black and white reversed.
Even in the case of a B/D display, only the display of the D mode image is reversed.
NEGA : Displays a negative image.

POSI : Displays a positive image.
5-5-6. Image Select (D)

This function enables you to select whether to set a Doppler spectrum image with priority on image quality, or with
priority on sensitivity.
RESO : Displays an image with priority on resolution.

STD : Standard setting
PENET : Displays an image with priority on sensitivity.
Note
When RESO (resolution priority) is selected, the resolution improves, but the sensitivity is reduced.
When PENET (sensitivity priority) is selected, the sensitivity improves but the resolution is reduced.
Select the optimum setting for the part to be examined, while observing the acoustic power index.
5-16
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-5-7. Manual Focus (D)

This function enables you to select the position at which to set the focus point when Manual of Focus (D) is selected.
[Remark]
You can change to Manual by activating this function, even if Focus (D) is in the Auto
status.
[Remark]
You cannot set all of the focus points to OFF.
One focus point always remains set.
5-5-8. Resolution Select (D)

This function enables you to set the Doppler spectrum either so that the resolution is improved in the frequency
direction, or so that it is improved in the time direction.
Time : The time resolution improves.

Frequency : The frequency resolution improves.
5-5-9. Smoothing (D)

Applying correlation in the frequency direction or in the time direction of a Doppler spectrum is called Smoothing
(D). When correlation is applied, the image becomes smooth in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Off : Correlation is not applied.

Low : The spectrum correlation is set to a low value.
High : The spectrum correlation is set to a high value.
5-17
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-5-10. Sweep Speed (D)

This function sets the sweep speed when a D mode image is displayed.
You can set the sweep time from the right edge of the screen to the left edge.
For the D mode image, D should be 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 sec/screen.
In the case of a B/D mode display, the sweep time becomes about 2/3 that of a D mode display.
The marks are displayed from the right to the left on D mode image every 0.5 seconds.
However, in the case of a real-time display, this mark appears only at the top and bottom ends of the image.
When the image is frozen, the mark appears at fixed intervals from the top end to the bottom end.
5-18
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6.FLOW/Power Flow/TDI Flow/TDI Power Flow menu
5-6. FLOW/Power Flow/TDI Flow/TDI Power Flow menu
5-6-1. Average (Flow)

This function sets the number of transmissions used to display blood flow. If the number of transmissions is large,
the sensitivity is improved, however the frame rate falls.
Low : The number of transmissions is set to a low value.

MED : The number of transmissions is set to a medium value.
High : The number of transmissions is set to a high value.
5-6-2. B Refresh
This function sets the time interval for rewriting a B mode image when B Flow and M Flow operate simultaneously.
1 : The B mode image is rewritten every 1 second.

2 : The B mode image is rewritten every 2 seconds.
5-6-3. Baseline Shift (Flow)

This function shifts the level that constitutes the baseline for forward and reverse flows.
When color is displayed in reverse, you can remove the reverse display by shifting the baseline.
You can set this function within the range −31 — 31.
[Remark]
This function operates only in the Flow mode. It can also be used after an image is frozen.
5-19
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-4. Capture Mode

This function continues to display color pixels for a fixed period of time. It enables you to obtain an image in which
there is continuity between the color pixels.
Off : Capture Mode is not activated.

On : The color pixels remain displayed for a fixed period of time.
5-6-5. Capture Time

This function sets the time during which the color pixels remain displayed. If this time is long, a smooth image is
obtained. If it is short, the resolution is improved.
1sec : The color pixels remain displayed for 1 sec.

Cont : The color pixels remain displayed until the image is frozen.
5-6-6. Color Map (Flow)

This function is used when displaying flow, to convert the color information (flow velocity, dispersion) in an image
into color, or to change the method of enhancement. It also operates after the image is frozen.
ABDOM : Changes the color distribution for the abdominal region.

Cardio : Changes the color distribution for the cardiac region.
PV : Changes the color distribution for the peripheral vessels.
POWER : Changes the color distribution to one that is suitable for Power Flow.
Other : Changes the color distribution to one intended for another application.
User : Changes the color distribution to that set by Color Coding Editor.
If you press the right menu select switch after setting the above applications, you can select a color pattern between
A and F.
5-20
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(ABDOM, PV)
A-E : A is a slightly dark color distribution, and E is a slightly bright color distribution.
(Cardio)
A : This is the basic coding in which an approaching flow is displayed in red, and
a receding flow in blue.
B : For cardiac applications. Used particularly to enhance dispersion.
C : For cardiac applications. High velocity forward flow is displayed in yellow,
and reverse flow in sky blue.
D : For cardiac applications. High velocity blood flow and dispersion are enhanced.
E : For cardiac applications. High velocity blood flow and dispersion are en-
hanced in green.
(Power)
A : Power information varies from purple to red.
B : Power information varies from pink to yellow.
C : Power information varies from light red to red.
D : Power information varies from light blue to blue.
E : Power information varies from black to white.
5-6-7. Color Polarity

Reverses the colors for forward /reverse flows (forward flow: Red, Reverse flow: Blow) when flow is displayed.
Also, the top and bottom of the color bar is reversed.
[Remark]
Operates only in the Flow mode. Also operates after the image is frozen.
Normal : Indicates forward direction flow in red.

Invert : Indicates forward direction flow in blue.
5-6-8. DDD
This function enables you to observe a B mode (black and white) image and a Flow mode image side by side in real-
time. In this case, the B+Flow mode image is displayed on the right half of the screen, and the B mode image on the
left half.
After freezing the images, you can switch the display to the B mode, and use the search function to display previous
images.
[Remark]
This function can be used in the Power mode as well.
You cannot perform separate search operations on the left and right images after freezing them.
Off : The B mode and Flow mode images are not displayed side by side.
On : The B mode and Flow mode images are displayed side by side.
5-21
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-9. Display Priority (Flow)

This function sets the information to be displayed preferentially if a black and white slice image coincides with a
color flow display.
Color : Displays only color information when both black and white informa-
tion and color information exists. This function is suitable for display-
ing fine blood flow such as that in the heart chambers or the abdominal
region.
Color2 : Displays only color data when both black and white data and color data
exist. This function is suitable for the TDI Flow mode used to observe
high speed data such as the motion of the cardiac muscle.
Both, Both2 : Displays both black and white information and color information when
both kinds of information exist. In the case of Both2, if the low velocity
components of the color data are large, the color data is cut off and
black and white data displayed preferentially.
5-6-10. DISP Priority Level (Flow)

This function sets the brightness level when either black and white information or color information is to be
displayed.
B&W Level : Sets the brightness level for displaying black and white information. If the echo is stronger that the
specified brightness, the black and white echo is displayed directly. Reducing the set value enables
clutter signals to be removed, but also reduces the blood flow signal. You can set the level between
0 and 63.
Color Level : Sets the flow velocity level for displaying color information. If the flow velocity is higher than the
set value, color is displayed directly. Increasing the set value enables clutter signals to be removed,
but also reduces the blood flow signal. You can set the level between 0 and 31.
5-6-11. Flow Filter (Flow)

This is a filter than removes low flow velocity components when displaying a signal that contains a lot of clutter
(wall motion noise) due to the effect of the heart wall, for example.
Select a value from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

The higher the set value, the greater is the degree to which wall motion noise is removed.
[Remark]
In the case of TDI Flow, you can make a selection from 1 and 2.
5-22
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-12. Focus (Flow)

A Flow mode image has 8 focus points when an electronic probe is used. You can set the focus at only 1 of these
points.
Auto : Sets 1 focus point near the center of the flow area.
5-6-13. Frame CORRE (Flow)

This function correlates adjacent frames. Increase the correlation when the frame rate is low, such as in the case of
the blood flow in the abdominal region, or when you wish to smoothen the image. Reduce the correlation when it is
necessary to observe the blood flow in real-time, such as in the case of the heart.
Set a value between 0 and 7.
5-6-14. Frame Rate (Flow)

This function adjusts the frame rate between −4 and 4 by setting a combination of Line Density (scanning density)
for both black and white images and color images in the Flow mode and the Power Flow mode.
The relation between the Frame Rate value and the Line Density for black and white and color images is shown be-
low.
Frame Rate −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Line Density (black & white) High High High MED MED MED Low Low Low
Line Density (color) High MED Low High MED Low High MED Low
5-23
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-15. Frame Rate Accelerator

This function creates an image in which the steps between frames are smoothed. It is suitable for images that have
a small frame rate, such as the blood flow in the abdominal region. Set it to Off when time resolution is important,
such as in the case of the heart.
Off : The flow image does not have continuity between frames.
On : An image in which there is continuity between frames is created.
5-6-16. Image Select (Flow)

This function enables you to select whether to set a color image with priority on image quality, or with priority on
sensitivity.
RESO : Displays an image with priority on resolution.

STD : Standard setting.
PENET : Displays an image with priority on sensitivity.
Note
When RESO (resolution priority) is selected, the resolution improves, but the sensitivity is reduced.
When PENET (sensitivity priority) is selected, the sensitivity improves but the resolution is reduced.
Select the optimum setting for the part to be examined, while observing the acoustic power index.
5-6-17. Manual Focus (Flow)

This function enables you to select the position at which to set the focus point when Manual of Focus (Flow) is se-
lected.
[Remark]
You can change to Manual by activating this function, even if Focus (Flow) is in the Auto
status.
[Remark]
5-24
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-18. Noise REDUC (Flow)

This function unifies the color pixel information in order to eliminate wall motion noise.
Off : Wall motion noise is not eliminated.

Low : A low degree of noise reduction is set.
MED : A medium degree of noise reduction is set.
High : A high degree of noise reduction is set.
5-6-19. PIX SMOOTH (Flow)

This function unifies the color pixel information so as to make the color flow easier to see.
Low: A low degree of color pixel unification is set.

MED: A medium degree of color pixel unification is set.
High: A high degree of color pixel unification is set.
5-6-20. Rejection (Flow)

This function removes low flow velocity components from the color information.
Use it to remove noticeable wall motion noise. (Note that in this case low velocity blood flow will also be removed.)
This function can also be used after the image is frozen.
Set one of 16 values between 0 and 15.
5-6-21. Smoothing (Flow)

This function applies correlation between adjacent lines of the ultrasound beam in the flow mode, resulting in a
smooth color image. Use a high correlation when observing large blood vessels, and use a low correlation when ob-
serving small blood vessels.
Set one of 7 values between 0 and 6.
5-25
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-6-22. Wall Motion Reduction

This function reduces noise when clutter signals (wall motion noise) are prominent.
Low : A low degree of wall motion noise reduction is set.

Medium1 : A low-medium degree of wall motion noise reduction is set.
Medium2 : A high-medium degree of wall motion noise reduction is set.
High : A high degree of wall motion noise reduction is set.
5-26
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7. Other menu
5-7-1. Area Lock

This function causes the flow area to move up, down, left or right when the Doppler cursor is moved, so that the
sample volume remains roughly at the center of the flow area.
When a B/M mode flow image is displayed, the flow area moves according to the motion of the M mode cursor.
Off : The flow area does not move according to the M mode cursor or the Doppler cursor.
On : The flow area moves according to the motion of the M mode cursor or the Doppler cursor.
5-7-2. Beam Steering

When observing the blood flow in the carotid artery, for example, using an electronic linear probe, it is difficult to
obtain blood flow information at a point where the ultrasound beam intersects the blood flow direction at right
angles.
Beam steering is a function that electronically tilts the ultrasound beam so that it is transmitted and received at an
oblique angle with respect to the blood flow direction, thus enabling information concerning the part being examined
to be obtained.
Set a value in 5° steps, between −15 and +15°.

The angle through which the beam can be steered differs depending upon the probe.
5-7-3. Body Mark Location

Use this function to change the display position of the body mark.
When you activate this function, you can move the displayed position of the body mark with the trackball. Pressing
the SET switch finalizes the set position.
5-27
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-4. Body Mark Menu

Using the trackball, move the arrow to the body mark that you wish to display, then press the SET switch.
The selected body mark is displayed.
5-7-5. B/SYNC Mode

This function enables you to display a normal B mode image in parallel with a B mode ECG sync image, and to
observe both images in real-time.
Off : A normal B mode image is not displayed in parallel with an ECG sync B mode image.
On : Displays a normal B mode image in parallel with an ECG sync B mode image.
5-7-6. Character Size

This function 4-time normal size of the characters displayed in the comment area.
Normal : Normal size characters are input.

Large : 4-time normal size characters are input.
5-7-7. Coding Editor

This function enables you edit a color map in the Flow mode. The edited color map can be displayed by selecting
User of Color Map (Flow) in the menu.
5-28
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-8. Color Map (B,M)

This function adds color to B mode and M mode image in order to make it easier to see.
Gray : Normal brightness characteristics

A : Blue and orange brightness characteristics
B : Blue brightness characteristics
C : Blue brightness characteristics that are weaker than B
D : Orange brightness characteristics
5-7-9. ECG Display

This function displays an ECG waveform.
Off : An ECG waveform is not displayed on the screen.

On : An ECG waveform is displayed on the screen.
[Remark]
The optional PEU-4000 is necessary.
5-7-10. ECG SYNC

This function displays only the part of B mode image indicated by the ECG sync mark on the ECG waveform.
You can acquire B mode image of an arbitrary time phase while observing the time phase of the ECG waveform.
Off : A normal B mode image without ECG sync is displayed.

On : Only the part of the B mode image indicated by the ECG sync mark is displayed.
[Remark]
5-7-11. Element Select

This switch alternates the active transducer when an intra-cavity probe having 2 transducers is used. You can change
the displayed image between Transverse and Longitudinal planes.
5-29
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-12. Graphic Color

This function sets the display colors for text and graphics on the screen.
A-E : Used to select colors from five predetermined display colors.

User : The display colors set using Graphic Editor are selected.
5-7-13. Graphic Editor

This function is used to edit, process or store the display colors of characters and graphic displays.
The display colors edited here can be displayed by selecting User of Graphic Color.
Plane1 — 7, Physio Plane : Selects and displays each plane for setting a color.
R,G,B : Processes the display color of each

plane.
Set values between 0 and 255.
5-30
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-14. Imaging Information

This function sets whether or not to display information concerning contrast, cine memory, etc., on an image.
Off : Information is not displayed.

On : Information is displayed.
5-7-15. Invert
This function reverses the left and right sides of the image when a B mode image is displayed.
It inverts the top and bottom of the image about the baseline when a D mode image is displayed.
Normal : The image is displayed in the normal orientation.

Invert : In the case of a B mode image, the image is displayed with left and right reversed.In the case of a D
mode image, the image is displayed with top and bottom inverted.
5-7-16. Invert Link

This function automatically changes the color polarity when a D mode image is inverted.
Off : The color polarity is not changed when a D mode image is inverted.
On : The color polarity is changed when a D mode image is inverted.
5-7-17. Menu Location

This function is used to change the display position of the menu.
Pressing this switch enables the display position of the menu to be moved with the trackball. Pressing the SET
switch finalizes the display position.
5-31
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-18. PCG Display

This function displays a PCG waveform.
Off : A PCG waveform is not displayed on the screen.

On : A PCG waveform is displayed on the screen.
[Remark]
5-7-19. PCG Filter

This function sets the PCG filter.
Low : Sets the PCG filter to Low.

MED : Sets the PCG filter to MED.
High : Sets the PCG filter is High.
[Remark]
5-7-20. Post Processing

This function changes the display brightness characteristics of the B mode image to be displayed on the viewing
monitor, according to the echo intensity.
You can change a black and white image displayed in 64 graduations to an arbitrary gray scale, in order to reduce
echo noise, and so on.
Four kinds of correction curves are available. It is possible to change the display brightness characteristics by select-
ing a curve and setting each level.
Linear : The level cannot be changed.

Slope1 : Echoes of a lower intensity than the region in which the brightness is ex-
panded are displayed at the minimum brightness, and echoes of a higher in-
tensity are displayed at the maximum brightness.
Slope2 : Echoes of a lower or higher intensity than the region in which the brightness
is expanded are displayed at the minimum brightness.
Slope3 : Changes in echoes of a lower or higher intensity than the region in which the
brightness is expanded are compressed to 1/4 before being displayed.
Reject : Echoes that are lower than the set level are displayed at the minimum bright-
ness.
5-32
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
The correction curve characteristics are as follows.
Linear
This is the condition in which the levels are fully expanded, that is, the condition White
Brightness
in which all 64 gradations are used. All echoes are displayed at a brightness cor-
responding their intensity.
Black
0 Low High
Echo intensity Max
Slope 1
Echoes of a lower intensity than the region in which the brightness is to be ex- White
Brightness
panded are displayed at the minimum brightness, and echoes of a higher intensity
are displayed at the maximum brightness.
Black
0 Low High
Slope 2 Echo intensity Max
Echoes of a lower or higher intensity than the region in which the brightness is to White
Brightness
be expanded are displayed at the minimum brightness.
Black
0 Low High
Echo intensity Max
Slope 3
Changes in echoes of a lower or higher intensity than the region in which the White
Brightness
brightness is to be expanded are compressed to 1/4 before being displayed.
Black
0 Low High
Reject Echo intensity Max
Echoes that are lower than the set level are displayed at minimum brightness. White
Brightness
Black
0 Low High
Echo intensity Max
5-33
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-21. Post Process.LEV
Low : Selects a shift of the lower limit of the zone.

High : Selects a shift of the upper limit of the zone.
Shift : Selects a position shift.
If Slope 1, Slope 2 or Slope 3 is selected
Low High
In the case Shift In the case of Reject
5-34
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-22. Pulse Display

This function displays a pulse waveform.
Off : A Pulse waveform is not displayed on the screen.

On : A pulse waveform is displayed on the screen.
[Remark]
5-7-23. R Wave Beep

Used to emit a beep tone when the R wave is detected on the ECG waveform display.
Off : A beep tone is not emitted when the R wave is detected.

On : A beep tone is emitted when the R wave is detected.
5-7-24. R-Delay Time

This function sets the time phase for performing ECG SYNC, as the delay time from the R wave.
Set a time between 0.00 and 2.55 sec in steps of 0.05 sec.
5-7-25. Send to Storage (S)

Sends frozen images via a network to an external storage medium such as a file server.
[Remark]
The optional SOP-4000-20B is necessary.
5-7-26. Send to Storage (M)

Sends loop images acquired to a VCM via a network to an external storage medium such as a file server.
[Remark]
5-35
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-27. Steering Invert

This function is used to steer the ultrasound beam in the Doppler or flow mode when a probe that enables the beam
to be steered is used.
Each time you use this function, the beam is deflected in the sequence Forward direction → Reverse direction → 0
→ Forward direction.
5-7-28. Steering Link

This function is used to automatically invert a D mode image when the polarity of the steering angle is changed by
beam steering.
Off : The D mode image is not inverted when the polarity of the beam steering angle is changed.
On : The D mode image is inverted when the polarity of the beam steering angle is changed.
5-7-29. Store on MO (S)

Stores frozen images in an MO disk. If an MO disk drive is not connected, the images are stored in the hard disk.
5-7-30. Store on MO (M)

Stores loop images acquired to the VCM in an MO disk.
5-7-31. Store on MO(JPG)

Stores frozen images in an MO disk. The saving type is JPEG type.
5-7-32. Store on CD-R BUFFER(S)

Stores frozen images in CD-R BUFFER.
5-36
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-33. Store on CD-R BUFFER(M)

Stores loop images acquired to the VCM in CD-R BUFFER.
5-7-34. Store on CD-R BUFFER(J)

Stores frozen images in CD-R BUFFER. The saving type is JPEG type.
5-7-35. Store on FD (JPG)

Saves static image to a floppy disk. The saving type is JPEG type.
5-7-36. Store on HDD (S)

Stores frozen images in the hard disk in the equipment.
5-7-37. Store on HDD (M)

Stores a loop image taking in VCM to a hard disk of the equipment.
5-7-38. Thermal Index

This function switches over the acoustic power index.
TIS : Switches to the thermal index for soft tissue.

TIB : Switches to the thermal index for bone.
TIC : Switches to the thermal index for the cranial bones.
5-37
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-39. View Gamma

This function corrects the brightness characteristics of the image, to match the brightness characteristics of the view-
ing monitor, or to enable the information for each part of the body being examined to be expressed effectively. View
Gamma enables you to select one of five correction curves.
Linear : The brightness characteristics do not change.

A : For cardiac examination. This curve has slightly weak brightness
characteristics.
B : For cardiac examination. This curve has slightly strong brightness
characteristics.
C : For examining the abdominal region. This curve has slightly weak
brightness characteristics.
D : For examining the abdominal region. This curve has slightly strong
brightness characteristics.
[Remark]
You can also set a correction curve after freezing the image.
5-7-40. Zoom Lock

This function is used to enlarge a B mode image centered about a Doppler sample.
Off : An enlarged image is displayed regardless of the display position of the Doppler sample.
On : An enlarged image is displayed centered on the Doppler sample.
5-7-41. PC Printer
The frozen image is directly printed to the printer in use.
[Remark]
It is requested to use a printer that has been recommended to use in our instruction.
5-7-42. DICOM Printer(S)

The frozen image is directly printed to the DICOM printer in use.
[Remark]
It is requested to use a printer that has been recommended to use in our instruction.
[Remark]
5-38
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-7.Other menu
5-7-43. Archive Group1

Printing functions (three functions can be registered maximum) assigned by the Print Select of Preset are carried out.


5-7-46. ACQUIRE -> Store (HDD)

When the Data management system (VCM) is being connected, a moving image can be saved in HDD after the
Acquire is turned On.
5-7-47. ACQUIRE -> Store (MO)

When the Data management system (VCM) is being connected, a moving image can be saved in the MO disk after
the Acquire is turned On.
5-7-48. ACQUIRE -> SEND

When the Data management system (VCM) is being connected, a moving image can be saved in network after the
Acquire is turned On.
5-39
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8.VCM Menu (The optional EU-9083 or EU-9111 is necessary.)
5-8. VCM Menu (The optional EU-9083 or EU-9111 is necessary.)
5-8-1. Option: EU-9083 or EU-9111
5-8-1-1. ActiveWindow Shift

When a split screen is displayed, press the ACQUIRE switch to acquire a loop image to the VCM, then set whether
or not to automatically move the active window (enclosed by a rectangular border).
Auto Shift : In the case of a divided display, if you press the ACQUIRE switch the active window moves to the
next window upon completion of data acquisition.
Manual : In the case of a divided display, the active window does not change when you press the
ACQUIRE switch.
5-8-1-2. Color Mode (VCM)

This function sets the palette type of the data for an acquired image to black and white or color.
Always Color : Always acquires an image as a color image regardless of the image display.
Always B&W : Always acquires an image as a black and white image regardless of the image display.
Set when you wish to increase the number of images to be acquired.
5-8-1-3. ECG Cycle(VCM)

This function sets the timing for starting and ending image acquisition by means of Acquire.
Current Cycle : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately before

Acquire was pressed to the R wave one heartbeat earlier.
Current 2 Cycles : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately before
Acquire was pressed to the R wave two heartbeats earlier.
Current 4 Cycles : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately before
Acquire was pressed to the R wave four heartbeats earlier.
Next Cycle : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately after Acquire
was pressed to the R wave one heartbeat later.
Next 2 Cycles : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately after Acquire
was pressed to the R wave two heartbeats later.
Next 4 Cycles : Acquires an image from the R wave immediately after Acquire
was pressed to the R wave four heartbeats later.
5-40
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-1-4. Format (VCM)

Selects the acquisition method and screen dividing method.
Full : Displays an image over the full screen.

Split : Splits the screen into two parts and displays two images simultaneously.
Quad Small : Divides the screen into four parts and displays four images
simultaneously. The four images are displayed in reduced form.
Quad Large : Divides the screen into four parts and displays four images
simultaneously. The magnification of the images is unchanged. Instead,
only a part of each image is displayed.
5-8-1-5. Frame Rate (VCM)

This function sets the method of acquiring image data using the ACQUIRE switch.
Max60Hz : Acquires image data at a frame rate that matches the TV sync of the VCM.
Set this item when you wish to acquire images at a frame rate of 60 Hz.
Max30Hz : Acquires only 60 Hz frame rate images at a rate of 30 Hz by thinning the data.
5-8-1-6. Load
This function specifies and reads the patient / examination / image from the disk.
For details, refer to Section 2. “Cine Memory and Store Image”.
5-8-1-7. Load(Stress Echo)

Reads stress echo image data stored in an MO disk to a VCM.
When this function is operated, a search dialog box is displayed.
5-41
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-1-8. Load Again

This function re-reads the image data that was last read, from the disk.
5-8-1-9. Load Next

When multiple images are selected using Load, the image immediately following these images in this range is read
from the disk.
5-8-1-10. Load Previous

When multiple images are selected using Load, the image immediately preceding these images in this range is read
from the disk.
5-8-1-11. Loop Mode (VCM)

This function sets the sync method used for loop playback of a divided screen display.
Short : The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to match the window
corresponding to the shortest loop playback period.
Long : The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to match the window
corresponding to the longest loop playback period.
Align : The loop playback period of all windows is lengthened to match the
window corresponding to the longest playback period.
The loops of all windows are reset simultaneously.
Free Run : The data of each window is played back (loop playback)
asynchronously.
5-8-1-12. Quad Position

This function sets the actual part of an image that is displayed in the Quad Large divided screen mode when the im-
age is not displayed over the full screen. However, only the image in the active window is set.
Active : Specifies the position shift of the active segment in the image display area.
Position All : The positional shift of the image display area is applied to the entire memory.
5-42
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-1-13. Quad Position Setup

Specifies the image display area when Format is Quad Large. If you use this function when Format is set to Full,
a blue border (area) will appear on the screen. Move the area with the trackball then finalize the position with the
SET switch.
5-8-1-14. Send to Storage

Displays a dialog box for sending image data via a network to an external storage medium such as a file server.
[Remark]
5-8-1-15. Store (Stress Echo)

Stores stress echo image data. The data is stored one stage at a time, and at the end of the protocol all of the data is
stored in an MO disk in a single operation.
5-8-1-16. Store on Disk

Displays a dialog box for storing an image in an MO disk.
5-8-1-17. Stress Mode

Applies a drug or other load to the heart, and examines (stress echo) the heart for abnormalities.
Off : The system does not enter the stress echo examination mode.
On : The system enters the stress echo examination mode.
[Remark]
This function does not operate unless a patient ID has been entered.
5-43
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-1-18. TV Sync
This function is for setting a display timing of ultrasound image.
Off :Displays it without adapting itself to Television synchronization spacing.

Field :Displays it to Television synchronization spacing. The frame rate of display screen changes in 1 for the
integer number of 120Hz (120,60,40,30,24,.. ...).
Frame :Displays it to Television synchronization spacing for VCM taking in.
The frame rate of display screen changes in 1 for the integer number of 60Hz (60,30,20,15, .. ...).
5-8-1-19. Zoom (VCM)

This function is used in the divided screen mode to display the image temporarily displayed in the active window
(enclosed by a rectangular border) over the full screen.
Off : Returns the display to the condition prior to the full-screen display.
On : Zooms in and displays an image over the full screen.
5-8-2. Option: EU-9083
5-8-2-1. Protocol Select

Selects the protocol to use prior to performing a stress echo.
Exercises,2Phases : Stage(Pre-Exercises,Post-Exercises),
View(PLAX,PSAX,A4CH,A2CH)
Exercises,4Phases : Stage(Pre-Exercises,Peak-Exercises,
Post-ExercisesRecovery),View(PLAX,PSAX,A4CH,A2CH)
Pharmacologic,BLPR :Stage(Baseline,Low dose,Peak dose,Recovery),
Pharmacologic,BLMP: Stage(Baseline,Low dose,Mid dose,Peak dose),
User : Protocol set by the user.
5-8-2-2. User Protocol

Displays a dialog box for editing a stress echo protocol that can be set by the user.
For details, refer to Section 2-6. “Stress Echo Examination (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)”.
5-44
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-3. Option: EU-9111
5-8-3-1. Stress Echo Control

Switches the common functions which are operable in Stress Echo and Normal operations.
Off : Sets for which the trackball and the Rotary encoder 1 are not to be used in a Stress Echo examination.
On : Sets for which the trackball and the Rotary encoder 1 are to be used in a Stress Echo examination.
5-8-3-2. Protocol
Starts Stress Echo examination.
Off : Finishes Stress Echo examination.

On : Starts Stress Echo examination.
5-8-3-3. Pause Protocol

Returns to a normal B mode screen from a Stress Echo screen.
Off : Returns to a Stress Echo screen.

On : Escapes from a Stress Echo screen, and returns to a normal B mode screen.
5-8-3-4. Stress Acquire

Takes in a Stress Echo screen.
5-8-3-5. Priority Cycle Select

Selects a View which requires changing a Priority Cycle.
5-45
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-3-6. Skip View

Skips the taking-in of View set in a protocol.
5-8-3-7. Acquire Data Cancel

Erases the Stress Echo screen acquired last.
5-8-3-8. Label
Switches the View name in Shuffle.
Displays a dialog which selects the View name.
5-8-3-9. Timer
Displays the Timer at the time of image taking in.
Off : Stops the Timer count and does not display the Timer.
On : Displays the Timer and starts the Timer count.
5-8-3-10. Shuffle
Displays the Images taken in for comparison (Shuffle) with 4 screens.
View : Performs a shuffle display for each view.

Stage : Performs a shuffle display for each stage.
5-46
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-3-11. Format(Quad)
Sets the size of screens on the 4 screen display.
Quad Small : Divides the screen into four and displays the 4 screens simultaneously.
The four images are displayed in contraction.
Quad Large : Displays a part of image as an alternate of without changing the magnifying power.
5-8-3-12. Systolic Loop

Makes a Loop playback for image in systole only.
Off : Makes a Loop playback for all images on one heartbeat.

On : Makes a Loop playback for image in systole only.
5-8-3-13. Systolic Loop,Time

Sets the time of Loop playback when setting a Systolic Loop to On.
300ms : Loop playback takes place from the R wave to a point 300 ms after it.
5-8-3-14. Load(Continuous)
Loads acquired images using the Continuous Acquire operation of moving images from the HDD or external media
5-8-3-15. Continuous Acquire

Starts or ends the Continuous Acquire function (continuous acquring of moving images).
Off : Ends the Continuous Acquire function (continuous acquiring of moving images).
On : Starts the Continuous Acquire function (continuous acquiring of moving images).
5-47
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-8-3-16. Scoring
Performs scoring on the acquried images.
Off : Hiddens the Schema dialog and returns to the Shuffle screen.
On : Displays the Schema dialog in the View specified by a blue frame and perform scoring.
5-8-3-17. Scoring Report

Displays the result of scoring in a report form.
Off : Closes the report display and returns to the Shuffle screen.
On : Displays the result of scoring in a report form.
5-48
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9.RT 3D Menu (The optional EU-9112 is necessary.)
5-9. RT 3D Menu (The optional EU-9112 is necessary.)
5-9-1. Image Parameter

This function is used in the real-time 3D image mode to enable the 3D data acquisition range to be changed and also
the real-time performance and image quality to be improved.
Four parameters, Scan Area (3D), Scan Angle (3D), Line Density (3D) and Frame Density (3D) can be set in ad-
vance in a preset.
5-9-2. Scan Angle(3D)

Sets the scanning angle in the electronic scanning direction in the real-time 3D image mode.
100% : Scanning takes place over a 100% (60°) range.

5-9-3. Line Density(3D)

Sets the scanning line density in the electronic scanning direction in the real-time 3D image mode.
Low : Sets the scanning line density in the electronic scanning direction to a coarse value.
Med : Sets the scanning line density in the electronic scanning direction to a medium value.
High : Sets the scanning line density in the electronic scanning direction to a fine value.
5-9-4. Frame Density(3D)

Sets the image density in the mechanical scanning direction when a real-time 3D image is displayed.
Low : Sets the scanning line density in the mechanical scanning direction to a coarse value.
Med : Sets the scanning line density in the mechanical scanning direction to a medium value.
High : Sets the scanning line density in the mechanical scanning direction to a fine value.
5-49
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-5. RefA
This function changes the image of electronic scanning direction active state.
5-9-6. RefB
This function changes the image of mechanical scanning direction active state.
5-9-7. RefC
This function activates the image seen from below (Ref C).
5-9-8. 3D
This function changes the 3D image active.
5-9-9. Reset(3D)
This function resets the 3D image display conditions (rotation, parallel shift and image display size) to the initial
conditions.
5-9-10. Brightness(3D)
This function sets the brightness of the active three orthogonally intersecting cross-sections or 3D image.
5-50
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-11. Rendering Mode

Sets the rendering mode of a 3D image.
Shaded : The object surface is drawn. The surface changes according to the setting.
Brightest : The maximum echo intensity data on a ray is displayed, and the object is drawn translucently.
X-ray : The mean echo data on the ray is displayed, and the object is drawn more transparently than for
Brightest.
Lighted : Uses the gradient shading algorithm to draw an image that appears as if light is being reflected
from its surface.
5-9-12. Translation
This function permits a horizontal shift of a RefA, RefB, RefC or 3D active image either in real-time or when frozen.
5-9-13. Gamma (3D)

This function changes the brightness characteristics of a real-time 3D image to enable the data concerning the ex-
amined body part to be expressed effectively.
You can change the Gamma (3D) in 16 steps from 1 to 16.
5-9-14. Border Frame

This function creates a display of the border of a rectangular parallelepiped that indicates the volume data range in
a 3D image.
Off : The border of a rectangular parallelepiped is not displayed.

On : The border of a rectangular parallelepiped is displayed.
5-51
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-15. Overlay Graphic

This function selects display or non-display of the front cut plane line, cross-sectional position line, visual field
(camera), View Control Indicator, and so on, displayed on a 3D image / cross-sectional image.
Off : The graphics are not displayed.

On : The graphics are displayed.
5-9-16. 3D Smooth
Smoothens a 3D image. This function is used to display the skin of a fetus, for example, smoothly.
Off : The 3D image is not smoothed.

On : The 3D image is smoothed.
5-9-17. Smoothing (3D)

Smooths the line data in order to reduce noise in a real-time 3D image.
Off : The 3D image is not smoothed.

1-7 : The smoothing level for a 3D image can be set between 1 and 7.
5-9-18. Function Indicator

Displays the function condition of trackball in the top left corner of the active screen.
Off : The function condition of the 3D View Control trackball is not displayed.
On : The function condition of the 3D View Control trackball is displayed.
5-52
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-19. Orientation(3D)
Use it to turn a 3D image of a fetus upright, for example.
You can select an orientation angle from 0°, 90°, 180° and 270° .
5-9-20. Detail Scan

This function enables you to call a high quality image setting using a single button touch when you wish to view part
of a displayed image (e.g. part of the face of a fetus) as a high resolution image. A limit is imposed on the display
range, but multiple setting values including the scanning line density are maintained in real time, resulting in a higher
quality image.
Off : The display returns to the display (including the magnification, position and Line Density) that
existed prior to entering the Detail Scan mode.
On : Calls parameters from a preset that result in a high quality image in the Detail Scan setting
screen of Image Parameter.
5-9-21. Color Map (3D)

Sets the display colors of a 3D image. A setting between A and H can be made.
5-9-22. Erase Tool

This function enables you to use a trace on a 3D image to surround an unwanted part of the image with the trackball
and erase the surrounded area.
5-9-23. Erase Area Reset

This function returns the display to the image area that was displayed prior to being deleted using Erase Tool.
5-53
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-9-24. Loop (3D)

Plays back a 3D image in the specified playback range using an animation display.
5-9-25. Loop Direction

Specifies Round trip or One way for the loop playback direction.
5-9-26. Rotation Axis

Specifies whether loop playback is to be performed in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.
5-9-27. Step Angle

Specifies the playback range of the volume data for which loop playback is to be performed.
The playback range can be set in 1° steps between 1° and 45°.
5-9-28. Rotation Angle

Specifies the playback range of the volume data for which loop playback is to be performed.
The playback range can be set in 10° steps between 10° and 180°, and the image is constructed at intervals set using
Step Angle.
5-9-29. Loop Speed

Adjusts the loop speed when a 3D image in the playback range set by Loop (3D) is displayed as an animated image.
The loop playback speed can be set between 1 Hz and 30 Hz.
5-54
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-10.FAM Menu (The optional SOP-4000-11B is necessary.)
5-10. FAM Menu (The optional SOP-4000-11B is necessary.)
5-10-1. Active FAM Off

While displaying multiple cursors, delete current active cursors.
5-10-2. Contrast (FAM)

Sets a contrast of M mode image.
Sets it by 17 phases from 0 through 16.
5-10-3. Cursor Size

Size contraction / magnification is possible at a middle point of an optional M cursor as the center of size adjustment.
Within the display range from 1 through 8, it can change the range.
[Remark]
5-10-4. FAM Mode

Creates an optional M mode image.
Off : Finishes FAM Mode.

On : Operates FAM Mode.
5-10-5. Gamma (FAM)

This function is for correcting expression of information effectively with changing brightness characteristics of M
mode image pertaining to diagnostic part.
The setting is made on five steps from 0 through 4.
5-55
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-10.FAM Menu (The optional SOP-4000-11B is necessary.)
5-10-6. Magnification (FAM)

With referring to the size of B mode image as a base, the amplification of M mode image is set.
The setting values are; × 0.5, × 0.75, × 1, × 1.5, × 2.
5-10-7. Multi FAM

Sets the number of cursor displayed. It is possible to display two or three cursors maximum.
5-10-8. PSAX
This function is for displaying plural cursors simultaneously, in order to display M mode image of the left ventricle
minor axis (Parasternal Short Axis View) simply and easy.
Off : Finishes the display of an M cursor for the left ventricle minor axis.
On : Displays an M cursor for the left ventricle minor axis.
5-10-9. Sweep Speed (FAM)

Sets a time coefficient in displaying an M mode image.
The time coefficient from the right end of image to the left end is set from the step of second; 1,1.5,2,3,4,6 and 8.
[Remark]
When changing the set value after freeze, there is no way to change to a higher value than the set value at the time
of freeze.
5-56
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-11.Contrast Harmonic Echo menu (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)
5-11. Contrast Harmonic Echo menu (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)
5-11-1. Contrast Harmonic Echo

This function receives the second harmonic waves from the contrast agent and displays an image.
Off : Disables the Contrast Harmonic Echo.

On : Activates the Contrast Harmonic Echo.
5-11-2. Intermittent Trigger Mode

This function transmits ultrasonic waves intermittently in order to prevent the contrast agent from being broken up
by the ultrasonic waves when performing transmission and receiving using a contrast agent.
Off : Disables the Intermittent Trigger Mode.

On : Activates the Intermittent Trigger Mode.
5-11-3. 2B Display
Switches over the Intermittent Trigger Mode display to a 2B display.
Off : Switches over to a B mode display.

On : Switches over to a 2B display. The first image is displayed on the right, and the second and subsequent
images are displayed on the left.
5-11-4. Select INTERM

Sets the type of operation in the Intermittent Trigger Mode in which A, B, C and D are set in advance.
You can set each type of operation using INTERM Interval and INTERM Frame.
A-D : Sets the desired type of operation.
5-57
MN1-1174 Rev.9
5-11.Contrast Harmonic Echo menu (Option: CHM-4000 is necessary)
5-11-5. INTERM Interval

When ECG is OFF, sets the transmission interval for each of A, B, C and D. When ECG is ON, sets the synchronous
R-wave interval for each of A, B, C and D.
0.1 - 30.0 (sec) : Set the time interval for intermittent transmission.
1 - 30 (beats) : Set the R-wave interval for intermittent transmission.
5-11-6. INTERM Frame

Sets the number of frames to be transmitted and received during one trigger, for each of A, B, C and D.
1 - 30 (frames): Sets the number of frames.
5-11-7. Sequence Start

Sequentially starts the types of operation for Sequence A, B, C and D that were set in advance.
When Sequence Start is selected, operation takes place in the sequence A ~ D, and the image automatically freezes.
Off : Disables the Sequence Mode.

On : Activates the Sequence Mode.
5-11-8. Timer
This function displays a timer on the screen, and then starts the timer count.
Off :The timer counter does not start.

On :The timer count starts.
5-58
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-1.PRESET function
6. PRESET
6-1. PRESET function
This function can store set conditions, and recall them as necessary. By using a preset, you can adjust and set the
system using simple procedures, thus reducing the examination time. The set values can be switched over according
to the purpose of use, diagnostic region and differences between individual operators, or conversely can be unified.
In addition, by storing settings in the system, you can avoid troublesome condition setting work and eliminate the
risk of making incorrect condition settings.
This system has a total of 15 user-definable settings for an image quality adjustment and display modes.
With Common Preset, users can set common items to each preset by one operation.
The system has a total of 30 standard settings that are suitable for various diagnostic fields. These settings consist
of four settings for the abdominal region (Abdomen, Abdomen H.F., Abdomen D.P., and Intestine), seven settings
for obstetrical applications (OBST, OBST-TV, Fetal Heart, Fetal Brain, Placenta, OBST-VOL, and OBST-TV
VOL), two settings for gynecological applications (GYN and GYN-TV), six settings for the cardiac region (Cardiac,
Cardiac D.P., Cardiac TDI., P. HEART, T.E.E., and Stress Echo), three settings for the peripheral vessels (Carotid,
Vein, and TCD), two setting for superficial organs (Small Part and Breast), two settings for the urethral organs (Pros-
tate and Kidney), and four settings for other regions (Operation, Orthopedic, Hip joint and Brachytherapy).
The system is set at the factory so that when it is switched ON the ABDOM preset is automatically activated.
A preset is called when one of the following operations is performed.
(1) When the PRESET switch is pressed
(2) When the PRESET switch is not pressed, and
a. NEW PATIENT or PROBE is switched over
b. The system is switched ON

6-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-2.Procedure for Changing the Set Contents
6-2. Procedure for Changing the Set Contents

<The following is a description of the procedure for changing the contents of an application using the
Preset Set-Up Menu as an example.>

→ The preset list is displayed on the screen.
Fig. preset list
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Set-Up of Preset, and press the SET switch.
→ The preset selecting list appears.
To measurement preset
Fig. Preset selecting list
6-2
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the application whose contents you wish to change, and press the SET
switch.
→ The set screen shown below appears.
Tree-view:
Set screen List box:
selection menu Display a list of candidates (pull-down
menu), and select a candidate.
Text box:
Enter a name directly from the keyboard.
Fig. Preset Set-Up Menu
[Remark]
When you wish to switch over to another setting screen, use the trackball to move the arrow to the screen in the set-
ting screen selection menu on the left side of the screen that you wish to display, and press the SET switch.
Exit Returns to the preset selecting list after finalizing the changed set conditions.
Cancel Cancel Returns to the preset selecting list after returning the changed set conditions to the previous condi-
tions
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to, and press the SET switch.
→ The list of selection contents is displayed.
(5) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the application whose contents you wish to change, and press the SET
switch.
→ The selection contents is displayed.
6-3
MN1-1174 Rev.9
(6) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the probe list, and press the SET switch.
→ The probe registration screen appears.
Switch over the

kind of probe.
Selectable probes.
(7) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the probe name that you wish to register, and press the SET switch.
→ The probe name is registered in the probe list.
[Remark]
When you switch over to a probe registered in the probe list, the corresponding preset is automatically executed.
[Remark]
Probe Select
On : When you execute a preset, the probe registered in it is automatically activated.If a number of probes are
registered in a preset, the probe will be selected preferentially from the probe in the top connection position.
Off : The probe is not switched over to another one, even if a preset containing that probe is executed.
6-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3. Common Preset

Register the set items that are common to each preset.
6-3-1. Common Preset1 - 2
(1) Press the PRESET switch, then move the arrow to Set-up of Preset using the trackball, and press the SET switch.
→ The preset list appears on the touch panel.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Common Preset, and press the SET switch.
→ The Common 1 screen appears.
Fig. Common 1 screen
Fig. Common 2 screen
[Remark]
If you wish to switch over to Common2, move the trackball to move the arrow to Common2 in the setting screen
selection menu on the left side of the screen, and press the SET switch.
[Remark]
All of the setting screens have the following three buttons.
Exit Returns to the preset selecting list after finalizing the changed set conditions.
Cancel Returns to the preset selecting list after returning the changed set conditions to the previous conditions.
Initialize Returns the registered contents of the displayed items to the initial values.
6-5
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
Name Function Setting

Common1
Hospital Name Registers hospital names. 20 characters × 2 lines
Date Registers dates.
Time Registers times.
Unit (Height) Registers the unit of height for the ID input screen. cm, m, feet/inch
Unit (Weight) Registers the unit of weight for the ID input screen. kg, Pound
Date Format Registers the date formats for the ID input screen. YY/MM/
DD,mmM.DD,YY,mm.DD,'YY,
DD-MMM-YY, DD-MM-'YY
Resume Stores the system status just before power-off, and does Off
not recall the same status next time the power is turned
on.
Stores the system status just before power-off, and On
recalls the same status next time the power is on.
Timer Freeze Does not perform the automatic freeze of safety Off
functions.
Automatically freezes the system if you do not use On
within the set time.
Timer Freeze, Time Register the time when Timer Freeze is set to ON. 1 — 20min (1min Step)
T.B. Speed Sets the response speed of the trackball. −5 to 5 (1 Step)
Comment Position Sets the position of the character-cursor to be displayed (Sets coordinates.)
(X), (Y) in the comment area.
Focus Limit(Flow) In a Flow and a Triplex, a depth restriction is not applied Off
to a focus setup.
In a Flow and a Triplex, a depth restriction is applied to On
a focus setup.
6-6
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

Common2
Printer Select (B/W) Sets a monochrome printer. 309/895, P91
Printer Select Sets a color printer. 707/21MD, CP700, CP900
(Color)
Number of Print Sets the number of continuous prints with a 1,2,3,4,5
monochrome printer.
Menu Display on Does not erase the menu display in printing. Display
Print Erases the menu display in printing. Erase
Menu Display A menu is displayed with a MENU switch. MENU SW
Method A menu is displayed with a MENU switch or rotary MENU SW or RE
encoder2.
VCR Memory Sets VCR Memory by the field. Field
Sets VCR Memory by the frame. Frame
Video IN Displays input signals from the Composite of the VCR Composite
IN.
Displays input signals from the S (T/C) of the VCR IN. S (Y/C)
Video OUT, Does not put the Color Burst on the VCR OUT or the Off
Color Burst VIDEO OUT.
Puts the Color Burst on the VCR OUT and the VIDEO On
OUT.
Panel Beep Does not produce a beep sound. Off
Produces a beep sound when the panel switches are Panel
pressed.
Produces a beep sound when the keys on the keyboard Keyboard
are pressed.
Produces a beep sound when the panel switches or All
Keyboard are pressed.
Alarm Does not produce a beep sound when a message is Off
displayed.
Produces a beep sound when a message is displayed. On
Image Browser, It displays images from the oldest one on Image OLD TO NEW
ORDER Browser.
It displays images from the latest one on Image Browser. NEW TO OLD
Image Browser, Sets the loading media for Review. HDD, BUFFER, MO, CD
Disk
Image Browser, Displays by a patient in the Thumb Nail screen for Per Patient
Page REVIEW .
Displays all of patients sequentially in the Thumb Nail Continuous
screen for REVIEW .
6-7
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3-2. Probe Menu

In Probe Menu, probes to be selected with the PROBE switch are registered.
(1) Press the PRESET switch, then move the arrow to Set-up of Preset using the trackball, and press the SET
switch.
→ The preset selecting list appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Probe Menu, and press the SETswitch.
→ The Probe Menu screen appears.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to , and press the SET switch.
→ The list of probes which can be registered is displayed.
6-8
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
(4) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the probe name that you wish to register, and press the SET switch.
→ The probe is registered.
[Remark]
The contents which are set in Probe Menu correspond to the following probe menu.
6-9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3-3. Print Select

It can assign the PRINT switch on the control panel up to three functions.
It can act for saving three images with one switch operation.
[Remark]
Where functions are assigned, assign Custom-Foot SW, Custom-TB, and RE on Preset Set-Up Menu to the Archive
Group 1 - 3 switches.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Print Select , and press the SETswitch.
→ The following screen appears.
Fig. Print Select screen
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the function which is intended to assign Archive Group 1 switch and
→ The function selected is set to the Archive Group 1 switch.
[Remark]
Only one among B/W Printer, Color Printer, and Auto Printer Select can be selected .
[Remark]
You cannot select B/W Printer and Color Printer when Auto Printer Select is selected.
(3) With the same operation as step (2), functions can be assigned to Archive Group 2 and Archive Group 3
switches respectively.
[Remark]
It returns to the default when the Initialize at the upper left is pressed.
6-10
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3-4. VCM (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)

VCM makes settings related to the VCM function.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to VCM of the screen select menu on the left side of the screen, then
Fig. VCM

VCM
Color Mode Color images are always acquired regardless of the mode. Always Color
When Format is Split or Quad, images are always acquired Always B/W
as black and white images.
Frame Rate(VCM) Image data is acquired at the frame rate of the main Max60Hz
equipment that matches the TV sync of the VCM.
Image data is acquired at a frame rate of 30 Hz by Max30Hz
thinning, only when the frame rate of the main equipment
that matches the TV sync of the VCM is 60 Hz.
ECG Cycle The image corresponding to one heartbeat before the Current Cardiac Cycle
ACQUIRE switch was pressed is acquired.
The image corresponding to two heartbeats before the Current 2Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to four heartbeats before the Current 4Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to one heartbeat after the Next Cardiac Cycle
The image corresponding to two heartbeats after the Next 2Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to four heartbeats after the Next 4Cardiac Cycles
6-11
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

Format Displays an image over the full screen. Full
Divides the screen into two parts, and displays two images Split
simultaneously.
Divides the screen into four parts, and displays four Quad Small
The four images are displayed in reduced form.
Divides the screen into four parts, and displays four Quad Large
The magnification of the images is unchanged. Instead,
Active Window In the case of a divided screen display, the active window Manual
Shift does not change when the ACQUIRE switch is pressed
In the case of a divided screen display, when the Auto Shift
ACQUIRE switch is pressed the active window proceeds
to the next window once data acquisition is completed.
Loop Mode The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to Long
match the window corresponding to the longest loop
playback period, and the loops of all windows are reset
simultaneously.
The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to Short
match the window corresponding to the shortest loop
simultaneously.
The loop playback period of all windows is lengthened to Align
match the window corresponding to the longest playback
period, and the loops of all windows are reset
simultaneously.
The data of the four screens is played back (loop playback) Free Run
asynchronously.
Window When the Format setting is made on Split, Qiad Small and Active
Quad Large, saving and transmission are available only
for the active window.
When the Format setting is made on Split, Qiad Small and All
Quad Large, saving and transmission are available for the
all windows.
Store (Stress Echo) A stress echo data is saved (stored) on HDD only. HDD
A stress echo data is transferred to MO disk automatically MO
after saving (storing) on HDD.
6-12
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3-5. VCM (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)

VCM makes settings related to the VCM function.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to VCM of the screen select menu on the left side of the screen, then
Fig. VCM

VCM
Color Mode Color images are always acquired regardless of the mode. Always Color
When Format is Split or Quad, images are always acquired Always B/W
as black and white images.
Frame Rate(VCM) Image data is acquired at the frame rate of the main Max60Hz
equipment that matches the TV sync of the VCM.
Image data is acquired at a frame rate of 30 Hz by Max30Hz
thinning, only when the frame rate of the main equipment
that matches the TV sync of the VCM is 60 Hz.
ECG Cycle The image corresponding to one heartbeat before the Current Cardiac Cycle
The image corresponding to two heartbeats before the Current 2Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to four heartbeats before the Current 4Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to one heartbeat after the Next Cardiac Cycle
The image corresponding to two heartbeats after the Next 2Cardiac Cycles
The image corresponding to four heartbeats after the Next 4Cardiac Cycles
6-13
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

Format Displays an image over the full screen. Full
Divides the screen into two parts, and displays two images Split
simultaneously.
Divides the screen into four parts, and displays four Quad Small
The four images are displayed in reduced form.
Divides the screen into four parts, and displays four Quad Large
The magnification of the images is unchanged. Instead,
Active Window In the case of a divided screen display, the active window Manual
Shift does not change when the ACQUIRE switch is pressed
In the case of a divided screen display, when the Auto Shift
ACQUIRE switch is pressed the active window proceeds
to the next window once data acquisition is completed.
Loop Mode The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to Long
match the window corresponding to the longest loop
simultaneously.
The loops of all windows are simultaneously reset to Short
match the window corresponding to the shortest loop
simultaneously.
The loop playback period of all windows is lengthened to Align
match the window corresponding to the longest playback
period, and the loops of all windows are reset
simultaneously.
The data of the four screens is played back (loop playback) Free Run
asynchronously.
Window When the Format setting is made on Split, Qiad Small and Active
Quad Large, saving and transmission are available only
for the active window.
When the Format setting is made on Split, Qiad Small and All
Quad Large, saving and transmission are available for the
all windows.
Stress Echo
Format(Quad) Divides the screen into 4 displays and the four images are Quad Small
displayed simultaneously.
Four images are displayed small in contraction.
Divides the screen into 4 displays and four images are Quad Large
displayed simultaneously.
Displayes a part of image instead of without changing the
magnifying power of image.
6-14
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

Store Saves the Stress Echo data in HDD only. HDD
After saving Stress Echo data in HDD, these are MO
transferred to a disk automatically.
Saves the Stress Echo data to CD-R Buffer. CD-R Buffer
Systolic Loop Makes Loop playback in the all screens of one heartbeat. Off
Makes Loop playback in the only screen during systole. On
Systolic Loop, Time Loop playback takes place from the R wave to a point 300 300ms
ms after it.
Loop playback takes place from the R wave to a point 330 330ms
ms after it.
Loop playback takes place from the R wave to a point 360 360ms
ms after it.
6-15
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset
6-3-6. DICOM Store/Send, Address, Printer

The DICOM Store/Send, Address, Printer function performs settings related to DICOM NETWORK and
DICOM STORAGE.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to DICOM Store/Send, Address, Printer of the screen menu at the left
side of the screen, and press the SET switch.
• DICOM Store/Send
conditions for
Storing/sending image
Communication check
Setting the
network server
• DICOM Address
• DICOM Printer
Communication check
Setting a DICOM
printer
6-16
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

DICOM Store/Send
Private Tag A private tag is not provided to DICOM data output. None
A private tag is provided to DICOM data output. Put into file
In saving DICOM data to a server, a private tag is provided. Put into Network
In saving DICOM data to a MO or a server, a private tag is Put into Both
provided.
JPEG Q Factor Sets the % compression of an image when Syntax is set to JPEG. 50 — 99
The smaller the numerical value, the higher is the %
compression.
Store on Disk
Color Stores a color image in a disk in Palette Color. Palette Color
Stores a color image in a disk in RGB. RGB
B/W Stores a black and white image in a disk in MONOCHROME2. MONOCHROME2
Stores a black and white image in a disk in RGB. RGB
Syntax Sets the transfer syntax for storing an image in a disk. Implicit Little, Explicit
Little, RLE Lossless, JPEG
Send to Storage
Color Sends a color image to a network in Palette Color. Palette Color
Sends a color image to a network in RGB. RGB
B/W(VCM) Sends a black and white image to a network in MONOCHROME2
MONOCHROME2.
Sends a black and white image to a network in RGB. RGB
Local Ping This function checks whether or not TCP/IP of the main
equipment is operating normally.
Remote Ping This function checks whether or not TCP/IP of the network *Remake
server selected by Connect is operating normally in the network.
Remote C-ECHO This function checks whether or not the function that supports
DICOM of the network server selected by Connected exists and
is operating.
Work List Ping This function checks whether or not TCP/IP of the Worklist
server is operating normally in a network.
Work List C-ECHO This function checks whether or not TCP/IP of the Worklist
server is operating normally in a network.
Connect Switches over the network server at the send destination. Local
Local: SSD-4000 main equipment Remote1 — 5
Remote1-5: Network server Worklist
Worklist: Worklist server
** If the worklist service and the image storage service are
implemented by independent Appli. Entities, the Worklist server
can be registered only in Worklist. However, if one Appli. Entity
is used for both the Worklist and image storage, register one of
Remote1-5 to make it active.
Appl. Entity Inputs the DICOM standard program name assigned to the main Key input
equipment or a network server.
Station Name Inputs the name of the computer assigned to the main equipment Key input
or a network server.
6-17
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-3.Common Preset

IP Address Inputs the network address No. assigned to the main equipment Key input
or a network server.
Port# Inputs the TCP/IP port No. used by DICOM and assigned to the Key input
main equipment or a network server.
Router1,2 Specifies the address of the TCP/IP router. Key input
If a router is not used, this item is left blank.
Subnet Mask This is a TCP/IP network mask. Key input
Normally, it is set to 255.255.254.0.
Time Out Sets the communication time out in second units. 1 — 1000
[Remark]
Ping and C-ECHO can be used only when all settings for “Appl. Entity”, “Station Name” and “IP Address” of
No.1 - 5 are input. When you start Ping or C-ECHO, the examination starts, so subsequently follow the instructions
in the dialog box.

DICOM Address
Department Used to enter the name of the department in the hospital. Key input
Address Used to enter the address of the hospital. Key input

DICOM Printer
DICOM Printer Used to make settings related to the DICOM printer.
Ping This function checks whether or not TCP/IP of the *Remake
DICOM printer of the selected No. is operating normally
in the network.
C-ECHO This function checks whether or not the function that *Remake
supports DICOM of the DICOM printer of the selected
No. exists and is operating.
Model name Used to enter the printer name. NP-1600/1660
GENERAL
Appl. Entity Used to enter the name of the program in the printer Key input
server.
Station Used to enter the printer server name. Key input
IP Address Used to enter the address of the network line. Key input
Port # Used to enter the port number used for DICOM Key input
communication. The standard setting for DICOM is 104.
6-18
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4. Preset Control

Preset Control is a function that copies, rearranges and copies (to a floppy disk) setting data (settings related to im-
ages and measurement) for each preset No.
It is also used to copy Annotation Dictionary, Body Mark Library, Common Preset, Color Map data to a floppy disk.

→ The preset list appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Set-up of Preset, then press the SET switch.
→ The preset setting select list appears.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Preset Control, and press the SET switch.
→ The Preset Control screen appears.
Kind of data (List box) : Used to select and set the kind of data from Preset No., Annotation Dictionary, Body
Mark Library, Common Preset and Color Map.
Copy : Copies data.
Move : Rearranges data.
US to US : Copies data inside the equipment.
To Floppy : Copies data in the equipment to a floppy disk.
From Floppy : Copies data in a floppy disk into the equipment.
: Select when you wish to copy or rearrange data.
You cannot select this item unless data has been selected.
Exit : Returns to the preset setting selection list.
[Remark]
To select each button, move the arrow to a button using the trackball, and press the SET switch.
6-19
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4-1. Method of copying preset No. data to a floppy disk

[Remark]
The preset name is used as the data filename.
If necessary, change the preset name in the Preset Set-up Menu in advance.
(1) Insert a formatted floppy disk in the equipment.
(2) Set the kind of data in Preset No.
(3) Select Copy.
(4) Select To Floppy.

(5) Select the name of the preset that you wish to copy, from the US column.
→ The preset name in the US column is highlighted in blue, indicating that you can select .
(6) Select .
→ The message “In progress. Please wait.” appears.
[Remark]
NEVER remove the floppy disk while the “In progress. Please wait.” message is displayed.
(7) When copying is completed, the name of the copied preset appears in the Floppy box.
6-20
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4-2. When copying preset No. data inside the equipment
(1) Select Preset No.
(2) Select Copy.
(3) Select US to US.
(4) Select the name of the copy source preset

from the left US column.
(5) Select the name of copy destination preset

from the right US column.
(6) Select .
(7) When copying is completed, the preset name on the right changes to the copy source preset name.
6-4-3. When copying Preset No. data from a floppy disk
(2) Select Copy.
(3) Select From Floppy.
(4) Select the copy source preset name from the

Floppy column.
(5) Select the copy destination preset name from

the US column.
(6) Select .
(7) When copying is completed, the name of the copied preset changes to the preset name in the US column.
6-21
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4-4. When rearranging Preset No. data
(2) Select Move.
(3) Select a preset name from the left US column.
(4) Select a preset name from the right US column.
(5) Select .
(6) The positions of the preset name selected from the

left US column and the preset name selected from
the right US column are interchanged.
6-4-5. When copying data in Annotation Dictionary to a floppy disk
(1) Select Annotation Dictionary.
(3) Select the copy source dictionary from the US col-

umn.
(4) Select .
(5) When copying is completed, the filename called

Dic User* is displayed in the Floppy column.
[Remark]
A filename is automatically assigned to the data.
6-4-6. When copying data in Annotation Dictionary from a floppy disk
(1) Select Annotation Dictionary.
(3) Select the copy source Dic User* from the Floppy
column.
(4) Select the copy destination dictionary name from

the US column.
(5) Select .
(6) When copying is completed, the filename Dictio-

nary* is displayed in the US column.
6-22
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4-7. When copying Body Mark Library from a floppy disk

You can additionally register in the equipment up to 20 special body marks created using Body Mark Editor in a PC.
(1) Select Body Mark Library.
(2) Select a body mark file from the Floppy column.
(3) Select a library No. from the US column.
(4) Select .
(5) When copying is completed, the filename of the

body mark file appears in the US column.
6-4-8. When copying Common Preset data to a floppy disk
(1) Select Common Preset.
(3) Select a common preset from US.
(4) Select .
(5) When copying is completed, a filename called

Common User appears in the Floppy column.
6-4-9. When copying Common Preset data from a floppy disk
(1) Select Common Preset.
(3) Select a common preset from Floppy.
(4) Select a common preset from US.
(5) Select .
6-23
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-4.Preset Control
6-4-10. When copying Color Map to a floppy disk
(1) Select Color Map.
(3) Select a color map from US.
(4) Select .
(5) When copying is completed, the filename called

Color User* appears in the Floppy column.
[Remark]
A filename is automatically assigned to the data.
6-4-11. When copying Color Map from a floppy disk
(1) Select Color Map.
(3) Select a color user* from Floppy.
(4) Select a color map from US.
(5) Select .
6-24
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-5.Preset Set-up Menu
6-5. Preset Set-up Menu

The Preset Set-Up Menu is used to set the initial values, for example, in all presets of the selected preset No.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the No. corresponding to the preset in the preset setting select list
whose registered contents you wish to change, then press the SET switch.
→ The Preset Set-Up Menu appears.
Fig. Preset Set-Up Menu
Preset No. : Indicates the registration number of the preset. (Corresponds to the number in the
preset
Preset Name : Used to register or change the name of a preset. Enter the name from the keyboard.
The registered or changed name appears in the preset menu.
Application : Used to select the part of the body to be examined.
Study for Measurement : Used to select a measurement study corresponding to the Application to be mea-
sured.
Probe Select : You can register up to six kinds of probes to be connected. When a probe registered
here is connected, the auto calling function calls the preset in which the probe is reg-
istered.
Probe List : A list of probes that can be registered is displayed.
Initialize all presets : All items are initialized together according to the set application.
Set the present conditions : The conditions of the currently used equipment are registered together.
6-25
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-6.DISP-B, -M,D,-Flow, -ID,Comment, -Graphics
6-6. DISP-B, -M,D,-Flow, -ID,Comment, -Graphics

DISP-B, -M,D,-Flow, -ID,Comment, -Graphic are used to register the set conditions related to the screen display.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Display 1 to 5 in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and press
the SET switch.
• DISP-B
• DISP-M, D
6-26
MN1-1174 Rev.9
• DISP-Flow
• DISP-ID, Comment
• DISP-Graphics
6-27
MN1-1174 Rev.9

DISP-B
Display Mode Sets the display mode on startup. B,2B,B/M,B/D
Harmonic Echo Sets the Harmonic Echo to OFF on startup. Off
Sets the Harmonic Echo to ON on startup. On
Display Mode, Flow Sets the Flow mode to OFF on startup. Off
Sets the Flow mode to ON on startup. Flow
Sets the Power Flow mode to ON on startup. Power Flow
Display Mode, TDI Operates the D, Flow or Power Flow mode in the normal condition. Normal
Operates the D, Flow or Power Flow mode in the TDI condition. TDI
1B Format Displays a normal B mode image in B mode. Normal
Displays a B mode image in the B mode at a wide width. Wide
2B Format Displays a normal B mode image in 2 B mode. Normal
Displays a B mode image in the 2B mode at a wide width. Wide
B/* Format Displays a normal B/sweep mode image as a left-right display. L/R, Normal
Displays the sweep mode in a left-right display at a wide width. L/R, wide
Displays a normal B/sweep mode image as an upper-lower display. U/L, Normal
Displays a normal B mode image as an upper-lower display at U/L, wide
roughly half size.
Spectrum Size Displays the normal vertical direction of a spectrum in B/D and D Normal
mode.
Displays the vertical direction of a B/D or D mode spectrum at a Wide
wide width.
2B Mapping Divides the cine memory in the 2B mode after an image is frozen, Off
then displays the B mode image on the left half of the screen and
nothing on the right.
Enables you to display two B mode images side-by-side without On
dividing the cine memory in the 2B mode after freezing the images.
Image Direction Sets the initial scanning direction to right. Right
Sets the initial scanning direction to left. Left
Image Rotation Displays an image without rotating it on startup. 0°
Displays an image after rotating it 90°on startup. 90°
Triplex Mode When the B/D mode is selected, both the B and D displays are Triplex
activated.
When the B/D mode is selected, a B real time and D blank display B-Real
appear.
If the mode is switched over when a B mode image is displayed D-Real
with a D cursor, the B image freezes and the D image is displayed in
real time.
Triplex Mode Type When Triplex Mode is selected, MSE is activated. MSE
When Triplex Mode is selected, B-Refresh is activated. Refresh
Depth (CV/LN/PA) Sets the display depth on startup. (When the electronic convex, 2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,15,17,
linear, and sector are connected) 19,21,24cm
Depth (Mech) Sets the display depth on startup. (When the mechanical scanner is 2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,15,17,
connected) 19,21,24cm
Scan Area (B) Sets the B mode scanning range on startup. 25 — 100% (5% Step)
6-28
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Scan Area (B (Flow)) Sets the B mode scanning range used in the B (Flow) mode. 25 — 100% (5% Step)
Scan Area (B (Flow)/D) Sets the B mode scanning range used in the B (Flow)/D mode. 25 — 100% (5% Step)
6-29
MN1-1174 Rev.9

DISP-M,D
Position Shift Offsets the depth of the B mode image. −10 to 24cm (0.1cmstep)
Color Map (B,M) Displays a B mode or M mode image without adding color. Gray
Displays an image after adding a color between blue and orange. A
Displays an image after adding blue. B
Displays an image after adding lighter blue than that added when B C
is selected.
Displays an image after adding orange. D
Zoom Method When zoom is used, this item enlarges an image with reference to Center
the center.
Displays a zoom box on the image, then enlarges the image. Box
B Shift B does not follow the shift of the cursor in the B/D mode. Off
B follows the shift of the cursor in the B/D mode. On
Beam Steering Sets the deflection angle of the beam of an electronic linear probe. −15 — 15° (5° step)
Steering Link The spectrum is not inverted when the polarity is changed by Off
changing the deviation angle of the beam of the electronic linear
probe.
The spectrum is inverted when the polarity is changed by changing ON
the deviation angle of the beam of the electronic linear probe.
Image Polarity Displays a D mode image as a Posi display. Posi
Displays a D mode image as a Nega display. Nega
Sweep Speed (M) Sets the sweep speed of a M mode. 1.0,1.5,2.0,3.0,4.0,6.0,
8.0sec/Screen
Sweep Speed (D) Sets the sweep speed of a D mode. 1.0,1.5,2.0,3.0,4.0,6.0,
8.0sec/Screen
Echo Erase Does not use the Echo Erase function on startup. Off
Sets the Echo Erase function to ON on startup. On
Echo Erase Area Sets the range of the Erase when the Echo Erase is set to ON. 1 to 19 (1 Step)
Cursor Display (M) The cursor is erased when a B/M display reverts to a B image. Erase
The cursor remains when a B/M display reverts to a B image. Remain
Cursor Display (D) The cursor is erased when a B/D display reverts to a B image. Erase
The cursor remains when a B/D display reverts to a B image. Remain
Cursor Position Displays the cursor on the left screen. Left
Displays the cursor on the center screen. Center
Displays the cursor on the right screen. Right
PW Sound On Does not produce a PW sound when both the B and D modes are Off
activated in the system at the same while the D-cursor is displayed
on the B mode image.
Produces a PW sound when both the B and D modes are activated On
in the system at the same while the D-cursor is displayed on the B
mode image.
Sweep Method Displays the Scroll sweep method at B mode and D mode images. Scroll
Displays the Moving Bar sweep method at B mode and D mode Moving Bar
images.
6-30
MN1-1174 Rev.9

DISP-Flow
Flow Area (W),B (F) Sets the width of the flow area for a B (Flow) mode display. 5 to 100% (5% Step)
(B mode: 100%)
Flow Area (W), B (F)/* Sets the width of the flow area for a B (Flow)/D mode display. 5 to 100% (5% Step)
(B mode: 100%)
Flow Area (Height) Sets the height of the flow area for a B (Flow) mode and B (Flow)/D 25 to 100% (5%
mode display. (B mode: 100%) Step)
Flow Area Line Encloses the four corners of the flow area with a solid line. Brackets
Encloses the entire flow area with a dotted line. Dotted Line
Triplex VEL Range The velocity range of the D mode is the same as that of the B (Flow) Low
mode display in the B (Flow)/D modes simultaneous display. When the
velocity range is raised, both ranges rise in a 1: 1 ratio.
The velocity range of the D mode is twice as fast as that of the B High
(Flow) mode display in the B (Flow)/D modes simultaneous display.
When the velocity range is raised, both ranges rise in a 1: 2 ratio.
The B (Flow) velocity range is constant, and only the velocity range of B Fix
a D mode image rises in the B (Flow)/D modes simultaneous display.
Triplex, Frame Rate (B) Sets the interrupt time of the MSE to Low in the B (Flow)/D modes Low
simultaneous display.
Sets the interrupt time of the MSE to Medium in the B (Flow)/D modes Medium
Sets the interrupt time of the MSE to High in the B (Flow)/D modes High
Area Lock The Flow Area does not follow the sample volume. Off
The Flow Area follows the sample volume. On
Capture Time Sets the pixel holding time in the capture mode. 1sec, 2sec, 3sec
The pixels are held in the capture mode until the image is frozen. Continuous
Loop Point Sets the time phase automatically with the interval of R wave. One Beat
Sets the time phase on the first and last frames. Manual
T.B.Priority After an image is unfrozen, the trackball function that is used before Auto
(FRZ Off) the image is frozen is activated again.
After an image is unfrozen, the trackball function that is used before Unchanged
the image is unfrozen continues to be used.
T.B.Priority Activates the Search function automatically when an image is frozen. Search
(FRZ On) Activates the Bodymark function automatically when an image is Bodymark
frozen.
Activates the Comment function automatically when an image is Comment
frozen.
Activates the Measurement function automatically when an image is Measurement
frozen.
After an image is frozen, the trackball function that is used before the Unchanged
image is frozen continues to be used.
Thermal Index Displays the acoustic power index as a soft tissue coefficient. TIS
Displays the acoustic power index as a bone coefficient. TIB
Displays the acoustic power index as a cranium coefficient. TIC
6-31
MN1-1174 Rev.9

DISP-ID,Comment
ID Input Displays the ID Name screen on startup. ID Name
Displays the ID Obstetrics screen on startup. ID Obstetrics
Displays the ID Gynecology screen on startup. ID Gynecology
Displays the ID BSA screen on startup. ID BSA
Displays the ID Urology screen on startup. ID Urology
Sex Sets the sex. Male, Female, Other
BSA Equation Uses Du Bois equation to calculate BSA when ID BSA is selected. Du Bois
Uses Boyd equation to calculate BSA when ID BSA is selected. Boyd
GA/EDC Calculation Sets the calculating methods of the gestational age and estimated date of LMP,BBT,EGA,EDC
confinement when ID OB is selected. ,GA
Menstrual Date Sets the input methods of the date of menstruation period when ID GYN is LMP,BBT
selected.
Auto Comment Off When an image is unfrozen, the comment is deleted. Erase
When an image is unfrozen, the comment is not deleted. Remain
Character Size The characters used in a comment are standard size. Normal
The characters used in a comment are 4-time normal size. Large
Annotation Library Sets the ANNOTATION function to OFF when a comment is entered. Off
Sets the ANNOTATION function to ON when a comment is entered. On
Annotation Dictionary Sets the dictionary function when the ANNOTATION function is set to No.1, No.2, No.3,
ON. No.4, No.5, No.6
Annotation DIC. Type Annotations are displayed with full spelling. Full Spelling
Annotations are displayed in abbreviated form. Abbreviation
Annotation System Dic. Ready to use the System dictionary of the ANNOTATION function. Use
Not ready to use the System dictionary of the ANNOTATION function. Not use
Imaging Information Erases the automatic display in the image display area. Off
Displays the automatic display in the image display area. On

DISP-Graphic
Graphic Color The character on a screen and the color of graphics are set up. A, B, C, D, E, User
Puncture Guide Line Does not display puncture guide line on startup. Off
Displays puncture guide line on startup. On
Grid Display Type Sets the kind of grid display. A, B, C
Biplane Label Does not display the settings of the biplane label of the biplane trans Off
esophageal probe.
Displays the settings of the biplane label of the biplane trans esophageal On
probe.
Biplane Line Does not display the settings of the biplane line of the biplane trans Off
esophageal probe.
Displays the settings of the biplane line of the biplane trans esophageal On
probe.
Rotary Plane Mark Does not display the settings of the rotary plane mark of the biplane trans Off
esophageal probe.
Displays the settings of the rotary plane mark of the biplane trans On
esophageal probe.
Rotary Plane Angle Does not display the settings of the angle display of the rotary plane mark of Display
the biplane trans esophageal probe.
Displays the settings of the angle display of the rotary plane mark of the Erase
biplane trans esophageal probe.
OMNI Plane Sets the angle of the omni-plane. −45 — 45° (5°step)
OMNI Plane Mark Does not display the omni-plane mark. Off
Displays the omni-plane mark. On
OMNI Plane Angle Displays the angle of the omni-plane mark. Display
Does not display the angle of the omni-plain mark. Erase
6-32
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-7.Image 1 - 2, Focus, Post Processing
6-7. Image 1 - 2, Focus, Post Processing

Image 1 - 2, Focus, Post Processing are used to register the set conditions related to the image adjustments.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Image 1 - 3 in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and press
the SET switch.
• Image 1
• Image 2
6-33
MN1-1174 Rev.9
• Focus
• Post Processing
6-34
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Image 1
DVA (B, B/M, M) Sets the sending output for the B, B/M, and M modes. 0 to 100% (1% Step)
DVA (Other) Sets the sending output for the modes other than the above. 0 to 100% (1% Step)
DVA (Flow) Sets the sending output for the Flow mode. 0 to 100% (1% Step)
DVA (PFlow) Sets the sending output for the Power Flow mode. 0 to 100% (1% Step)
DVA (TDI) Sets the sending output for the TDI mode. 0 to 100% (1% Step)
Gain (B) Sets the gain for the B mode on startup. 30 to 90db (1db Step)
Gain (M) Sets the gain for the M mode on startup. M sets the correction value of B. −30 to 30db (1db Step)
Set the correction value of Gain (B).
Gain (PHD) When Harmonic is ON, set the Gain value at your required level. −30 to 30db (1db Step)
Set the correction value of Gain (B).
Line Density Sets a low scanning line density for the B mode. Low
Sets a standard scanning line density for the B mode. Medium
Sets a high scanning line density for the B mode. High
Line Density(Mech) Sets a low scanning line density for the B mode when the mechanical Low
radial scanners are connected.
Sets a standard scanning line density for the B mode when the mechanical Medium
Sets a high scanning line density for the B mode when the mechanical High
PRF Limit Does not limit the frame rate for short distances. Off
Limits the frame rate for short distances. On
Image/FREQ The probe operates at a high frequency. Resolution
(Normal) The probe operates at a slightly high frequency. Standard1
The probe operates at a slightly low frequency. Standard2
The probe operates at a low frequency. Penetration
Image/FREQ (THE) When Harmonic is On, the probe starts at a high frequency. Resolution
When Harmonic is On, the probe starts at a somewhat high frequency. Standard1
When Harmonic is On, the probe starts at a somewhat low frequency. Standard2
When Harmonic is On, the probe starts at a low frequency. Penetration
View Gamma Sets the brightness characteristics of the monitor display. Linear
Used for cardiac diagnosis. The curve has slightly weak brightness A
characteristics.
Used for cardiac diagnosis. The curve has slightly strong brightness B
characteristics.
Used for performing diagnosis in the abdominal region. The curve has C
slightly weak brightness characteristics.
Used for performing diagnosis in the abdominal region. The curve has D
slightly strong brightness characteristics.
Horizontal Smoothing Inter-line correlation is not applied. Off
Weak inter-line correlation is applied. Low
Strong inter-line correlation is applied. High
FTC (B) A B mode image is not displayed with edge enhancement. Off
A B mode image is displayed with edge enhancement. On
FTC (M) An M mode image is not displayed with edge enhancement. Off
An M mode image is displayed with edge enhancement. On
Smoothing (B) Sets the degree of 3-line interpolation. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Beam Processing In the B mode, multiple beams are received simultaneously and used to Multi
form an image.
In the B mode, the standard number of beams are used to form an image. Single
Frame Smoothing Frame smoothing is not applied. Off
Frame smoothing is applied. On
6-35
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Image 2
TV SYNC Takes in not to TV synchronization intervals. Off
Takes in to TV synchronization intervals. Field
Takes in to TV synchronization intervals. Frame
Ping Pong Does not display Ping Pong. Off
Displays Ping Pong. On
Frame CORRE Type Sets the frame correlation according to the frame rates of a B mode Auto
image.
Sets any frame correlation set by the user. Manual
Frame CORRE Level Sets the correlation level of the frame to lower than the previous frame. Low
Sets the correlation level of the frame to slightly lower (Medium 1) than Medium1
the previous frame.
Sets the correlation level of the frame to slightly higher (Medium 2) than Medium2
the previous frame.
Sets the correlation level of the frame to higher than the previous frame. High

Focus
Auto Focus Type When auto focus is used, the position of the focus point is held even if Unchanged
the range is changed.
When auto focus is used, the position of the focus point is returned to the Reset
auto focus point if the range is changed.
Focus (B) Displays a B mode image using 1-point auto focus. 1P
Displays a B mode image using special 2-point auto focus. 2P (@)
Displays a B mode image using 2-point auto focus. 2P
Displays a B mode image using 3-point auto focus. 3P
Focusing for a B mode image takes place at the position set by the user. Manual
Manual Focus (B) Sets the focus points when Manual is selected in Focus (B). 1 to 8 (A maximum of
4 steps can be set.)
Focus (M) Displays an M mode image using auto focus. Auto
Focusing for an M mode image takes place at the position set by the Manual
user.
Manual Focus (M) Sets the focus points when Manual is selected in Focus (M). 1 to 8 (Only 1 step can
be set.)
Focus (D, Flow) Displays a D, Flow mode image using auto focus. Auto
Focusing for a D, Flow mode image takes place at the position set by the Manual
user.
Manual Focus (D, Focusing for a D, Flow mode image takes place at the position set by the 1 to 8 (Only 1 step can
Flow) user. be set.)
6-36
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Post Processing
Post Processing The brightness characteristics of the display are not modified in any Linear
way.
Echoes that are lower than the zone whose brightness is to be expanded Slope1 (0 to 63)
are displayed at minimum brightness, and high echoes are displayed at
maximum brightness.
Echoes that are lower than the zone whose brightness is to be expanded Slope2 (0 to 63)
and also high echoes are displayed at minimum brightness.
The change in brightness of echoes that are lower than the zone whose Slope3 (0 to 63)
brightness is to be expanded and also high echoes is compressed to 1/4.
Echoes that are lower than the set level are displayed at minimum Reject (0 to 63)
brightness.
6-37
MN1-1174 Rev.9
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Post Processing on the left screen, and
→ IP Select (B) and (M) appear.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the IP Select (B), and press the SET switch.
→ The following setting screen appears.
Fig. IP Select (B)
Fig. IP Select (M)
6-38
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-8.Body Mark
6-8. Body Mark

Body Mark is used to assign the body mark.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Body Mark in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
• Body Mark
Fig. Body Mark screen
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the square frame, and press the SET switch.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the body mark to be registered, and press the SET switch.
→ The selected body mark is registered.
(4) Select the Probe and the Position, move the arrow to Exit using the trackball, and press the SET switch. The
screen returns to the Body Mark screen.
6-39
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-9.Menu
6-9. Menu
Menu is used to assign the menus.
A maximum of 12 items of menu can be registered with Page 1 and Page 2.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Menu in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and press the
SET switch.
• Menu
Fig. Menu screen
<Registering the menu>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the place to be registered in Page 1 or Page 2, and press the SET
switch.
(2) When you wish to insert a menu item, move the arrow to Insert with the trackball, and press the SET switch.
When you wish to overwrite a menu item, move the arrow to Over Write with the trackball, and press the
SET switch.
(3) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Select Items and then the menu item to be registered, and press the
SET switch.
→ The menu is registered.
<Erasing the menu>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the place to be erased in Page 1 or Page 2, and press the SET switch.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Delete, and press the SET switch.
→ The registration of the menu is canceled.
6-40
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-10.Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW
6-10. Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW

Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW are used to assign the custom switches.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW in the screen selecting
menu on the left screen, and press the SET switch.
• Custom-Foot SW
• Custom-TB, RE
Fig. Custom Switch screen
6-41
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-10.Custom-Foot SW,-TB,RE,-Function SW
• Custom-Function SW
Fig. Custom Switch screen
<Registering the switch>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the square frame, and press the SET switch.
→ The following list of the items that can be registered appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the item to be registered, and press the SET switch.
→ The list of the items are erased, and the selected item is registered with the Custom Switch.
6-42
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-11.Physio Signal
6-11. Physio Signal

Physio Signal is used to register the set conditions related to the physiological signals.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Physio Signal in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
• Option
Fig. Option screen

Physio Signal
ECG Display (B) Does not display an ECG when a B mode image is displayed. Off
Displays an ECG when a B mode image is displayed. On
ECG Display (Sweep) Does not display an ECG when a sweep mode image is displayed. Off
Displays an ECG when a sweep mode image is displayed. On
R-Delay Time Sets the time phase from the R wave when the B mode image is 0.00 to 2.55sec (0.05sec Step)
captured while the ECG SYNC is set to ON.
R-Wave Beep Does not produce a beep sound when the R wave is detected. Off
Produces a beep sound when the R wave is detected. On
R-Wave Blink Does not display a mark on the image when the R wave is detected. Off
Displays a mark on the image when the R wave is detected. On
PCG Display(B) Does not display a PCG when a B mode image is displayed. Off
Displays a PCG when a B mode image is displayed. On
PCG Display(Sweep) Does not display a PCG when a sweep mode image is displayed. Off
Displays a PCG when a sweep mode image is displayed. On
PCG Filter Sets the PCG filter to Low. L
Sets the PCG filter to M1. M1
Sets the PCG filter to M2. M2
Pulse Display(B) Does not display a pulse when a B mode image is displayed. Off
Displays a pulse when a B mode image is displayed. On
Pulse Display(Sweep) Does not display a pulse when a sweep mode image is displayed. Off
Displays a pulse when a sweep mode image is displayed. On
Sweep Speed(B) Sets the sweep speed of phisyo signal display on a B mode image. 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0,
8.0sec/screen
6-43
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-12.Doppler
6-12. Doppler
Doppler is used to register the set conditions related to the Doppler mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Doppler in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and press the
SET switch.
• Doppler
Fig. Doppler screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Doppler on the left screen, and press the
SET switch.
→ IP Select (D) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to IP Select (D), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (D)
6-44
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-12.Doppler

Doppler
DOP Gain Sets the value of the D mode gain. 0 to 60db (1db Step)
DOP Filter (PW) Controls the Doppler filter at the filter value corresponding the Auto
range of the velocity of the moving fluid.
Controls the Doppler filter at the fixed filter value. Manual
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the PW mode when Auto is selected in 1 to 12
(PW),AUTO DOP Filter (PW).
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the PW mode when Manual is selected 50Hz,100Hz,200Hz,400Hz,800H
(PW),MANU in DOP Filter (PW). z,1600Hz
DOP Filter (CW) Controls the Doppler filter at the filter value corresponding the Auto
range of the velocity of the moving fluid.
Controls the Doppler filter at the fixed filter value. Manual
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the CW mode when Auto is selected in 1 to 12
(CW),AUTO DOP Filter(CW).
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the CW mode when Manual is selected 50Hz,100Hz,200Hz,400Hz,800H
(CW),MANU in DOP Filter(CW). z,1600Hz
Velocity Range (PW) Sets the velocity range used when the PW mode is activated. 6.22 to 318.80cm/s
Velocity Range (CW) Sets the velocity range used when the CW mode is activated. 6.22 to 796.2 cm/s
Sample Volume Sets the sample volume used when the PW mode is activated. 0.5mm to 10.0mm
(0.5mm step)
High PRF Raises the flow velocity range, High PRF function does not Off
operate.
If the flow velocity is raised, High PRF function will operate. On
Zoom Lock Zoom does not follow the display position of the sample volume. Off
Zoom follows the display position of the sample volume. On
Base Line Position Sets the position of the baseline used when the D mode is −16 to 16 (1 Step)
activated.
Spectrum Invert Displays forward flow in the upward direction when the D mode is Normal
activated.
Displays forward flow in the downward direction when the D Invert
mode is activated.
Invert Axis Inverts the spectrum about the baseline. Base Line
Inverts the spectrum about the center of the image. Center
Color Map (D) Displays a D mode image without adding color. Gray
Displays an image after adding a color between blue and orange. A
Displays an image after adding lighter blue than that added when C
B is selected.
B Refresh Sets the refresh interval of a B mode image for a simultaneous B + 1
Flow/M + Flow display.
Refresh takes place every 1 second.
Refresh takes place every 2 second. 2
Angle Correction Registers in advance the angle correction value used when the D 0 to 80deg (1deg step)
mode is activated.
IP Select (D) The contrast, compression, smoothing, resolution, and image- 1 to 8
select for the D mode are registered in eight IP Select patterns.
6-45
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-13.Flow
6-13. Flow
Flow is used to register the set conditions related to Flow mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Flow in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and press the
SET switch.
• Flow
Fig. Flow screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Flow on the left screen, and press the SET
switch.
→ IP Select (Flow) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to IP Select (Flow), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (Flow)
6-46
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-13.Flow

Flow
Flow Gain Sets the gain for the Flow mode used on startup. 0 to 32 (1 Step)
Flow Filter Sets the flow filter. 1 to 6
Image/FREQ (Flow) The probe operates at a high frequency. Resolution
The probe operates at a slightly high frequency. Standard1
Line Density (F),B/W Sets a low scanning line density of the B mode when Flow is used. Low
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the B mode when Flow is used. Medium
Sets a high scanning line density of the B mode when Flow is used. High
Line Density (F), Color Sets a low scanning line density of the Flow mode when Flow is used. Low
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the Flow mode when Flow is used. Medium
Sets a high scanning line density of the Flow mode when Flow is used. High
Frame Rate (B+F/D) Sets the combinations of the number of scanning for the Flow mode and the Off, Medium1, Medium2,
number of scanning for the B mode in the B (Flow)/D modes simultaneous Fast
display. In order to reduce the number of the scanning, change OFF to FAST.
Average (Flow) Sets the number of transmissions of the Flow to a low value. Low
Sets the number of transmissions of the Flow to a mediate value. Medium
Sets the number of transmissions of the Flow to a high value. High
Velocity Range (Flow) Sets the speed range when the Flow is activated. 6.22 to 199.2cm/s
Wall Motion Reduction Sets the degree of eliminating the wall motion noise. In order to eliminate the Low,Medium1,Medium2,
noise, change Low to High. High
Color Map, Group Sets the group of the combinations of the velocity and the distribution of the Abdom, Cardio, PV,
color for the Flow. Power, Other, User
Color Map, Setting Sets the contents of the group of the combinations of the velocity and the A, B, C, D, E
distribution of the color for the Flow.
Spatial Smoothing Does not operate at present.
Display Priority When both the monochrome image and the color velocity display exist when Color, Both, Color2,
B + Flow mode is used, sets which information and how much information is Both2
displayed.
DISP PRIO LEV,B/W Sets the threshold of displaying the color image. 0 to 63
DISP PRIO LEV, Color Sets the threshold of displaying the color image. 0 to 31
Color Polarity Displays the forward direction in red, and the reverse direction in blue when Normal
the Flow is used.
Displays the forward direction in blue, and the reverse direction in red when Invert
the Flow is used.
Invert Link The color polarity does not change when the spectrum is inverted. Off
The color polarity changes when the spectrum is inverted. On
Rejection (Flow) Sets the level of removing the low velocity components of Flow color 0 to 15
information.
Frame Rate ACCEL Displays a Flow image by the frame. Off
Displays continuous images in the frame. On
Pixel Smoothing (Flow) The degree of smoothing of color pixel data is set to Low. Low
The degree of smoothing of color pixel data is set to Medium. Medium
The degree of smoothing of color pixel data is set to High. High
Noise Reduction The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Off
removal is set to OFF.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Low
removal is set to Low.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Medium
removal is set to Medium.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise High
removal is set to High.
Gain(B), B(F) Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Flow is used. -30 to +30
6-47
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-13.Flow

Gain(B), B(F)/* Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Flow is used. -30 to +30
IP Select (Flow) The frame correlation, smoothing, and image-select (Flow) for the Flow 1 to 8
mode are registered in eight IP Select patterns.
6-48
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-14.Power Flow
6-14. Power Flow

Flow is used to register the set conditions related to Power Flow mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Power Flow in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
• Power Flow
Fig. Power Flow screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Power Flow on the left screen, and press
the SET switch.
→ IP Select (Power) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to IP Select (Power), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (Power)
6-49
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-14.Power Flow

Power Flow
Flow Gain Sets the gain for the Power Flow mode used on startup. 0 to 32 (1 Step)
Line Density (F),B/W Sets a low scanning line density of the B mode when Power Flow is used. Low
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the B mode when Power Flow is Medium
used.
Sets a high scanning line density of the B mode when Power Flow is used. High
Line Density (F), Color Sets a low scanning line density of the Power Flow mode when Power Low
Flow is used.
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the Power Flow mode when Power Medium
Flow is used.
Sets a high scanning line density of the Power Flow mode when Power High
Flow is used.
Frame Rate (B+F/D) Sets the combinations of the number of scanning for the Power Flow mode Off,Medium1,Medium2,Fast
and the number of scanning for the B mode in the B (Flow)/D modes
simultaneous display. In order to reduce the number of the scanning,
change OFF to FAST.
Average (Flow) Sets the number of transmissions of the Power Flow to a low value. Low
Sets the number of transmissions of the Power Flow to a mediate value. Medium
Sets the number of transmissions of the Power Flow to a high value. High
Velocity Range (Flow) Sets the speed range when the Power Flow is activated. 6.22 to 199.2cm/s
Wall Motion Reduction Sets the degree of eliminating the wall motion noise. In order to eliminate Low,Medium1,Medium2,
the noise, change Low to High. High
Color Map, Group Sets the group of the combinations of the velocity and the distribution of Abdom, Cardio, PV, Power,
the color for the Power Flow. Other,
User
Color Map, Setting Sets the contents of the group of the combinations of the velocity and the A,B,C,D,E
distribution of the color for the Power Flow.
Display Priority When both the monochrome image and the color velocity display exist Color,Both,Color2,Both2
when B + Power Flow mode is used, sets which information and how
much information is displayed.
DISP PRIO LEV, Sets the threshold of displaying the monochrome image. 0 to 63
B/W
Power Flow Display Adds a background color to a Power Flow image. PF A
Does not add a background color to a Power Flow image. PF B
Noise Reduction The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Off
removal is set to OFF.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Low
removal is set to Low.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise Medium
removal is set to Medium.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise High
removal is set to High.
Gain(B), B(F) Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Power Flow is used. -30 to +30
6-50
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-14.Power Flow

Gain(B), B(F)/* Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Power Flow is used. -30 to +30
IP Select (Power) The frame correlation, smoothing, and image-select (Power Flow) for the 1 to 8
Power Flow mode are registered in eight IP Select patterns.
6-51
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-15.Tissue Doppler
6-15. Tissue Doppler

Tissue Doppler is used to register the set conditions related to the Tissue Doppler mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Tissue Doppler in the screen selecting menu on the left screen,
and press the SET switch.
• Tissue Doppler
Fig. Tissue Doppler screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Tissue Doppler on the left screen, and
→ IP Select (D) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow toe IP Select (D), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (D)
6-52
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-15.Tissue Doppler

Tissue Doppler
DOP Gain Sets the value of the Tissue Doppler mode gain. 0 to 60db,1db Step
DOP Filter (PW) Controls the tissue Doppler at the filter value corresponding Auto
the range of the velocity of the moving fluid.
Controls the tissue Doppler at the fixed filter value. Manual
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the PW mode when Auto is selected 1 to 12
(PW),AUTO in DOP Filter (PW).
DOP Filter Sets the Doppler filter for the PW mode when Manual is 50Hz,100Hz,200Hz,400Hz,
(PW),MANU selected in DOP Filter (PW). 800Hz,1600Hz
Velocity Range (PW) Sets the velocity range used when the PW mode is activated.
Sample Volume Sets the sample volume used when the PW mode is activated. 0.5mm to 10.0mm (0.5mmstep)
Zoom Lock Zoom does not follow the display position of the sample Off
volume.
Zoom follows the display position of the sample volume. On
Base Line Position Sets the position of the baseline used when the D mode is −16 to 16 (1step)
activated.
Spectrum Invert Displays forward flow in the upward direction when the D Normal
mode is activated.
Displays forward flow in the downward direction when the D Invert
mode is activated.
Invert Axis Inverts the spectrum about the baseline. Base Line
Inverts the spectrum about the center of the image. Center
Color Map (D) Displays a Tissue Doppler mode image without adding color. Gray
Displays an image after adding a color between blue and A
orange.
Displays an image after adding lighter blue than that added C
when B is selected.
B Refresh Sets the refresh interval of a B mode image for a simultaneous 1
B + Flow/M + Flow display.
Refresh takes place every 1 second.
Refresh takes place every 2 seconds. 2
Angle Correction Registers in advance the angle correction value used when the 0 to 80deg (1deg step)
D mode is activated.
IP Select (D) The contrast, compression, smoothing, resolution, and image- 1 to 8
select (D) for the Tissue Doppler mode are registered in eight
IP Select patterns.
6-53
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-16.Tissue Flow
6-16. Tissue Flow

Tissue Flow is used to register the set conditions related to the Tissue Flow mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Tissue Flow in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
• Tissue Flow
Fig. Tissue Flow screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Tissue Flow on the left screen, and press
the SET switch.
→ IP Select (Flow) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to IP Select (Flow), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (Flow)
6-54
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-16.Tissue Flow

Tissue Flow
Flow Gain Sets the gain for the Tissue Flow mode used on startup. 0 to 32 (1 Step)
Line Density (F), Sets a low scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Flow is used. Low
B/W Sets a mediate scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Flow is used. Medium
Sets a high scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Flow is used. High
Line Density (F), Sets a low scanning line density of the Tissue Flow mode when Tissue Flow is used. Low
Color Sets a mediate scanning line density of the Tissue Flow mode when Tissue Flow is used. Medium
Sets a high scanning line density of the Tissue Flow mode when Tissue Flow is used. High
Frame Rate (B+F/D) Sets the combinations of the number of scanning for the Tissue Flow mode and the Off, Medium1,
number of scanning for the B mode in the B (Flow)/D modes simultaneous display. In Medium2, Fast
order to reduce the number of the scanning, change OFF to FAST.
Average (Flow) Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Flow to a low value. Low
Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Flow to a mediate value. Medium
Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Flow to a high value. High
Velocity Range (Flow) Sets the speed range when the Tissue Flow is activated. 6.22 to 199.2cm/s
Wall Motion Reduction Sets the degree of eliminating the wall motion noise. In order to eliminate the noise, Low,Medium1,
change Low to High. Medium2,High
Color Map, Group Sets the group of the combinations of the velocity and the distribution of the color for Abdom, Cardio, PV,
the Tissue Flow. Power, Other, User
Color Map, Setting Sets the contents of the group of the combinations of the velocity and the distribution of A, B, C, D, E
the color for the Tissue Flow.
Display Priority When both the monochrome image and the color velocity display exist when B + Tissue Color,Both,Color2,
Flow mode is used, sets which information and how much information is displayed. Both2
B/W
Color Polarity Displays the forward direction in red, and the reverse direction in blue when the Tissue Normal
Flow is used.
Displays the forward direction in blue, and the reverse direction in red when the Tissue Invert
Flow is used.
Invert Link The color polarity does not change when the spectrum is inverted. Off
The color polarity changes when the spectrum is inverted. On
Rejection (Flow) Sets the level of removing the low velocity components of Tissue Flow color 0 to 15
information.
Noise Reduction The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise removal is Off
set to OFF.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise removal is Low
set to Low.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise removal is Medium
set to Medium.
The smoothing of color pixel data is performed, and the wall motion noise removal is High
set to High.
Gain(B), B(F) Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Tissue Flow is used. -30 to +30
6-55
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-16.Tissue Flow

Gain(B), B(F)/* Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Tissue Flow is used. -30 to +30
IP Select (Flow) The frame correlation, smoothing, and image-select (Flow) for the Tissue Flow mode 1 to 8
are registered in eight IP Select patterns.
6-56
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-17.Tissue Power Flow
6-17. Tissue Power Flow

Flow is used to register the set conditions related to Tissue Power Flow mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Tissue Power Flow in the screen selecting menu on the left
screen, and press the SET switch.
• Tissue Power Flow
Fig. Tissue Power Flow screen
<Setting IP Select>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the “+” mark shown next to Tissue Power Flow on the left screen, and
→ IP Select (Power) appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to IP Select (Power), and press the SET switch.
• IP Select (Power)
6-57
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Tissue Power Flow
Flow Gain Sets the gain for the Tissue Power Flow mode used on startup. 0 to 32 (1 Step)
Image/FREQ (Power) The probe operates at a high frequency. Resolution
Line Density (F), Sets a low scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Power Flow Low
B/W is used.
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Power Medium
Flow is used.
Sets a high scanning line density of the B mode when Tissue Power Flow High
is used.
Line Density (F), Color Sets a low scanning line density of the Tissue Power Flow mode when Low
Tissue Power Flow is used.
Sets a mediate scanning line density of the Tissue Power Flow mode Medium
when Tissue Power Flow is used.
Sets a high scanning line density of the Tissue Power Flow mode when High
Tissue Power Flow is used.
Frame Rate (B+F/D) Sets the combinations of the number of scanning for the Tissue Power Off, Medium1, Medium2, Fast
Flow mode and the number of scanning for the B mode in the B (Flow)/D
modes simultaneous display. In order to reduce the number of the
scanning, change OFF to FAST.
Average (Flow) Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Power Flow to a low Low
value.
Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Power Flow to a mediate Medium
value.
Sets the number of transmissions of the Tissue Power Flow to a high High
value.
Velocity Range (Flow) Sets the speed range when the Tissue Power Flow is activated. 6.22 to 199.2cm/s
Wall Motion Reduction Sets the degree of eliminating the wall motion noise. In order to eliminate Low,Medium1,Medium2,
the noise, change Low to High. High
Color Map, Group Sets the group of the combinations of the velocity and the distribution of Abdom, Cardio, PV, Power,
the color for the Tissue Power Flow. Other,
User
Color Map, Setting Sets the contents of the group of the combinations of the velocity and the A,B,C,D,E
distribution of the color for the Tissue Power Flow.
Display Priority When both the monochrome image and the color velocity display exist Color,Both,Color2,Both2
when B + Tissue Power Flow mode is used, sets which information and
how much information is displayed.
B/W
Power Flow Display Adds a background color to a Tissue Power Flow image. PF A
Does not add a background color to a Tissue Power Flow image. PF B
Gain(B), B(F) Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Tissue Power Flow is -30 to +30
used.
6-58
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Gain(B), B(F)/* Adjusts the brightness of B mode when Tissue Power Flow is -30 to +30
used.
IP Select (Power) The frame correlation, smoothing, and image-select (Power) for the 1 to 8
Tissue Flow mode are registered in eight IP Select patterns.
6-59
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-18.Stress Echo (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)
6-18. Stress Echo (Option: EU-9083 is necessary)

Stress Echo is a setting related to the Stress Echo mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Stress Echo of the screen select menu at the left side of the screen,
and press the SET switch. The following screen appears.
• Stress Echo
Fig. Stress Echo screen

Stress Echo
Protocol Sets the protocol when performing a stress echo examination. Exercize, 2 phase
Exercize, 4 phase
Phermacological, BLPR
Phermacological, BLMP
Stage 1 - 8 Displays a predetermined stage name when the setting of Protocol is not (Key input, 32 characters)
User.
When the setting of Protocol is User, you can enter the stage name from
the keyboard.
View 1 - 4 Displays a predetermined view name when the setting of Protocol is not (Key input, 16 characters)
User.
When the setting of Protocol is User, you can enter the view name from
the keyboard.
6-60
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-19.eStress Echo (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)
6-19. eStress Echo (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)

eStress Echo is a setting related to the Stress Echo mode.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to eStress Echo of the screen select menu at the left side of the screen,
• eStress Echo1
Fig. eStress Echo1 screen
• eStress Echo2
6-61
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-19.eStress Echo (Option: EU-9111 is necessary)
• eStress Echo3

eStress Echo1
Protocol Sets the protocol when performing a stress echo examination. Template Acquision,
Continous Acquision
Report Display Displays the scoring report as the table. Chart
Type Displays the scoring report as the schema(Stage). Shuffle Stage
Displays the scoring report as the schema(View). Shuffle View

eStressEcho2
Template Acquision
Protocol Name Sets the protocol. *Remark
ECG Cycle Sets the ECG Cycle. Next Cycles,
Previous Cycles
Stage(Fixed Sets the Stage name. *Remark
Sequence)
View Sets the View name. *Remark

eStressEcho3
Continous Acquision
Protocol Name Sets the protocol. *Remark
ECG Cycle Sets the ECG Cycle. Next Cycles,
Previous Cycles
Stage Sets the Stage name. *Remark
View Sets the View name. *Remark
[Remark]
As for the setting items of Protocol Name, Stage, and View, refer to Section 2-7-7. “LOAD(STRESS ECHO)”.
6-62
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-20.Contrast Echo
6-20. Contrast Echo

Contrast Echo makes settings related to Contrast Harmonic Echo.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Contrast Echo on the screen select menu at the left side of the screen,
• Contrast Echo
Fig. Contrast Echo screen
6-63
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-20.Contrast Echo
<Intermittent Echo>
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the "+" mark shown next to Contrast Harmonic Echo on the left side
of the screen, and then press the SET switch.
→ Intermittent Interval appears.
(2) Using the trackball, move the arrow to Intermittent Interval, then press the SET switch.
• Intermitten Interval
Fig. Intermittent Interval screen

Contrast Echo
Intermittent Method Performs transmission and receiving at the R-wave intervals. ECG
Performs intermittent transmission at the set time intervals, Time
regardless of the ECG display.
2B Display Switches over the Intermittent Trigger Mode display to a 2B On
display.
Switches over the Intermittent Mode display to a B mode Off
display.

Intermittent Interval
ECG On Sets the transmission interval when ECG is On 1 to 30.0 (1 step)
ECG Off Sets the transmission interval when ECG is Off. 0.1 to 30.0 sec
(0.1 to 1.0 : 0.1 step,
1.0 to 30.0 : 0.5 step
Frame No Sets the number of scanning frames for one trigger. 1 to 30 Frames (1 Frame Step)
Time Sets the duration of intermittent transmission. 0 to 999 sec
6-64
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-21.RT3D (Option: EU-9112 is necessary)
6-21. RT3D (Option: EU-9112 is necessary)

RT3D is used to register the set conditions related to Real time 3D display.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the RT3D Mode in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
press the SET switch. The following screen appears.
• RT3D
Fig. RT3D screen
Image Parameter
Fig. Image Parameter screen
6-65
MN1-1174 Rev.9
• Opacity Control1, 2
Fig. Opacity Control1 screen
Fig. Opacity Control2 screen

RT3D
3D Display Format Displays the image at startup as a 1-View image. 3D
Displays RefA and 3D views at startup as a 2-View Ref A/ 3D
image.
Displays the image at startup as a 4-View image. Ref ABC/ 3D
Border Frame Does not create the border of a rectangular Off
parallelepiped that indicates the volume data range in a
3D image.
Creates the border of a rectangular parallelepiped that On
indicates the volume data range in a 3D image.
6-66
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Overlay Graphic Does not display the front cut plane line, cross-sectional Off
position line, visual field (camera), View Control
Indicator, and so on, displayed on a 3D image / cross-
sectional image.
Displays the front cut plane line, cross-sectional position On
line, visual field (camera), View Control Indicator, and
so on, displayed on a 3D image / cross-sectional image.
Orientation (3D) Rotates a 3D image display in 90° steps. 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°
Color Map (3D) Sets the display color of a 3D image. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
Function Indicator Does not display the function condition of the 3D View Off
Control trackball in the top left corner of the active
screen.
Displays the function condition of the 3D View Control On
trackball in the top left corner of the active screen.
Zoom (3D) Sets the Zoom value of the 3D image. 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140,
160, 180, 200%
3D ROI Position Sets the position of the ROI. 20 - 80% (10% Step)
3D ROI Height Sets the height of the ROI. 25 - 100% (5% Step)
Rendering Mode Sets the rendering mode of a 3D image to Shaded. Shaded
Sets the rendering mode of a 3D image to Brightest.. Brightest
Sets the rendering mode of a 3D image to X-ray. X-ray
Sets the rendering mode of a 3D image to Lighted. Lighted
Smooth for Lighted Sets the degree of smoothing used when the rendering Low
mode is Lighted to Low.
Sets the degree of smoothing used when the rendering High
mode is Lighted to High.
Smoothing (3D) Smooths the line data in order to reduce noise in a real- Off, 1 - 7
time 3D image.
Gamma (3D) Changes the brightness characteristics of a real-time 3D 1 - 16
image to enable the data concerning the examined body
part to be expressed effectively.
Brightness (3D) This function sets the brightness of the active three 1 - 16
orthogonally intersecting cross-sections or 3D image.
3D Smooth Does not smoothen a 3D image. Off
Smoothens a 3D image. On
Loop Direction Performs one-way playback in the loop playback mode. Oneway
Performs Round trip in the loop playback mode. Round trip
Rotation Axis Performs playback from the vertical direction in the loop Vertical
playback mode.
Performs playback from the horizontal direction in the Horizontal
loop playback mode.
Step Angle Specifies the playback range of the volume data for 1° - 45°(1°step)
which loop playback is to be performed.
Rotation Angle Specifies the playback range of the volume data for 10° - 180°(10° Step)
which loop playback is to be performed.
Loop Speed Adjusts the loop speed. 1 - 30Hz (1Step)
6-67
MN1-1174 Rev.9

Image Parameter
Scan Area (3D) Sets the scanning width in the real-time 3D mode. 30 - 100% (5%Step)
Scan Angle (3D) Sets the scanning angle in the electronic scanning 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100%
direction in the real-time 3D mode.
Line Density (3D) Sets the scanning line density in the electronic scanning Low, Medium, High
Frame Density (3D) Sets the image density in the mechanical scanning Low, Medium, High
Detail Scan Sets Detail Scan: Scan Area (3D), Scan Angle (3D), Refer to the setting of each
Line Density and Frame Density in order to display a function.
partial high resolution 3D image.
Acquire Scan Sets Acquire Scan: Line Density, Frame Density in Refer to the setting of each
order to acquire 1-volume data. function.

Opacity Control1, 2
Low Level Sets the low level point of reverse curve of the Opacity 0 - 125 (5 Step)
curve.
High Level Sets the high level point of reverse curve of the Opacity 80 - 255 (5 Step)
curve.
Power Sets the tilt of the Opacity curve. 1.0 - 3.0 (0.1 Step)
6-68
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-22.Biopsy
6-22. Biopsy
On the Biopsy screen, you can set puncture adapters to be fixed to each probe.
(1) Using the trackball, move the arrow to the Biopsy Mode in the screen selecting menu on the left screen, and
press the SET switch. The following screen appears.
• Biopsy
Fig. Biopsy screen
Each probe indicated on the Biopsy screen is compatible with multiple puncture adapters. You can set the puncture
adapters to be fixed to each probe individually with the preset.
6-69
MN1-1174 Rev.9
6-22.Biopsy
6-70
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
Numerics B/SYNC Mode 4-2
Base Line Position 6-45,6-53
1B Format 1-62,6-28
Beam Processing 6-35
2B Format 6-28
Beam Steering 6-30
2B Mapping 6-28
Before Starting an Examination 1-36
3D 5-50
Biopsy 6-69
3D image 1-82
Biplane Label 6-32
3D Smooth 5-52
Biplane Line 6-32
BODY MARK 1-4
A Body Mark 6-39
ACOUSTIC POWER 1-3 Body Mark Library 6-19,6-23
ACQUIRE 1-3 Border Frame 5-51
Acquiring an image to the VCM 2-28 Brachytherapy Guide Lines 1-62
Acquiring an image using the FREEZE switch 2-30 Basic operation procedure 1-62
Acquiring moving images continuously 2-44 Grid display 1-62
Actions to be taken when a defect is detected 1-86 Target display 1-65
Adjusting 3 perpendicular sections 1-82 Brightness (3D) 5-50
Alarm 6-7 Browsing images 2-45
ANGLE 1-4 BSA Equation 6-32
Angle Correction 6-45,6-53
Annotation DIC. Type 6-32 C
Annotation Dictionary 6-19,6-22,6-32
CANCEL 1-5
Annotation Library 6-32
Capture Time 6-31
Application 6-25
Capturing images using Continuous Acquire function 2-42
Area Lock 6-31
C-ECHO 6-18
Auto Comment Off 6-32
Character Size 6-32
Auto Focus Type 6-36
CHM-4000 5-57
Average(Flow) 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
Cine Memory 2-1
Search number 2-3
B Cine Memory and store image 2-1
B Mode 1-49 Cine scale and search mark 2-5
2B MAPPING 1-50 CLEAR 1-5
2-screen display 1-49 Color Map 6-24
Basic Operation Procedure 1-49 Color Map (3D) 5-53
Single screen display 1-49 Color Map(B,M) 6-30
B Refresh 6-45,6-53 Color Map(D) 6-45,6-53
B Shift 6-30 Color Map,Group 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
B.L.S 1-10 Color Map,Setting 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
B/* Format 6-28 Color Polarity 5-31,6-47,6-55
B/D and D Modes 1-56 COMMENT 1-6
Basic operation procedure 1-57 Comment Position 6-6
B/M and M Modes 1-51 Common items for all the ID entry screens 1-39
Basic operation procedure 1-51 Common Preset 6-5
Cursor display for a free angular M-mode minor axis cross- Common Preset1 - 3 6-5
section image 1-55 Completion method of the Continuous Acquire 2-48
Example Completion of the Continuous Acquire function 2-44
When displaying three M cursors 1-54 Connect 6-17
Free angular M-mode 1-53 Continuous Acquire 2-41,2-48,5-47
M-WINDOW function 1-52 Continuous Acquire function 2-45
Simultaneous display of plural free angular M-mode cur- Continuous Acquire of images 2-42
sors 1-54 Continuous Acquire switch 2-41
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
CONTRAST 1-10 F
Contrast Harmonic Echo menu 5-57
FAM Menu 5-55
CURSOR 1-10
Find 1-44
Cursor Display 6-30
Flow 6-46
Cursor Position 6-30
Setting IP Select 6-46
CURSOR/B.L.S 1-10
Flow Area 6-31
Custom Switch
Flow Area Line 6-31
Registering the switch 6-42
Flow Display 1-59
Basic operation procedure 1-59
D Monochrome/Color real-time images simultaneous display
D Modes 1-56 1-60
Data Management 1-46 Flow Filter 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
Date 6-6 Flow Gain 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
Date Format 6-6 FOCUS 1-14
DDD 1-11 Focus(B) 6-36
Deleting a character 1-9 Focus(D,Flow) 6-36
Deleting a word 1-9 Focus(M) 6-36
DEPTH 1-12 Frame CORRE LEV. 6-36
Depth(CV/LN/PA) 6-28 Frame CORRE Type 6-36
DEPTH/RANGE 1-12 Frame Dessity(3D) 5-49
Detail Scan 5-53 FRAME RATE 1-15
DICOM Printer 2-26,6-18 Frame Rate 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
DICOM Storage 2-16 Frame Rate Accelerator 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
DICOM Store/Send, Address, Printer 6-16 Frame Smoothing 6-35
Display Mode 6-28 FREEZE 1-15
Display Priority 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58 FTC 6-35
Displaying a high-resolution 3D image 1-84 Full keyboard 1-35
Displaying a stress echo image 2-54 Full keyboard function 1-35
Displaying Moving Image Loop playback of 3D image Function Indicator 5-52
1-85
DOP FILTER 1-12 G
DOP Filter 6-45,6-53
GA/EDC Calculation 6-32
DOP Gain 6-45,6-53
GAIN 1-16
Doppler 6-44,6-45
Gain(B) 6-35
Gain(M) 6-35
DVA 6-35
Gain(PHD) 6-35
Gamma (3D) 5-51
E Graphic Color 6-32
ECG Display 6-43 Graphic Display 1-2
ECG Display(Sweep) 6-43 Grid Display Type 6-32
ECG Sync Display 4-2
Echo Erase 6-30 H
Echo Erase Area 6-30
Handling the instrument 1-86
Ending acquiring 2-44
HARMONIC ECHO 1-17
Ensuring patient safety 1-86
Harmonic Echo 5-9,6-28
Erase Area Reset 5-53
High PRF 6-45
Erase Tool 5-53
Horizontal SMOOTH(B) 5-9
Erasing unnecessary echoes of a 3D image 1-84
Hospital Name 6-6
eStress Echo 6-61
How to register a patient 1-42
EU-9083 5-40,5-44
EU-9111 2-41,5-40,5-45,5-55
Explanation of an ID entry screen 1-36 I
EXT 1-13 ID 1-17,1-36
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
ID Input 1-37,6-32 Menstrual Date 6-32

Image 1 - 3 6-33 MENU 1-21
Setting IP Select 6-38 Menu 5-1,6-40
Image Browser, Disk 6-7 Erasing the menu 6-40
Image Browser, Page 6-7 Registering the menu 6-40
Image Direction 6-28 Menu Contents
Image Information 1-41 Acquire Data Cancel 5-46
Image Parameter 5-49 ActiveWindow Shift 5-40
Image Polarity 2-26,6-30 B mode menu 5-5
Image Rotation 1-31,6-28 AGC 5-5
IMAGE/FREQ 1-18 Angle Gain 5-5
Image/FREQ 6-35,6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58 Beam Processing 5-5
Imaging Information 6-32 Brachytherapy 5-6
Interrupting a stress echo examination 2-54 Focus(B) 5-7
INVERT 1-19 Frame CORRE 5-7
Invert Axis 6-45,6-53 Frame CORRE LEV. 5-7
Invert Link 6-47,6-55 Frame CORRE Type 5-8
IP Select(B) 6-38 FTC 5-8
IP Select(D) 6-44,6-45,6-53 Guide Line Setting 5-8
IP Select(Flow) 6-46,6-48,6-56 Image Rotation(B) 5-9
IP SELECT(Image Processing Select) 1-20 Line Density(B) 5-9
IP Select(M) 6-38 Loop Mode 5-10
IP Select(Power) 6-49,6-51,6-57,6-59 Manual Focus(B) 5-10
Items varied depending on ID types 1-39 OMNI Plane 5-10
PRF Limit 5-11
J Puncture Guide Line 5-11
JPEG Q Factor 6-17 Relief(B) 5-12
Smoothing(B) 5-11
L Color Mode (VCM)
D mode/TDI-D menu
5-40
5-15
Line Density 6-35 Color Map(D) 5-15
Line Density(F),B/W 6-47,6-50,6-58 Compression Curve(D) 5-15
Line Density(F),Color 6-47,6-50,6-58 Filter Control(D) 5-15
Line Dessity(3D) 5-49 Focus(D) 5-16
Load(Continuous) 5-47 Image Polarity(D) 5-16
Loading Continuous Acquire 2-48 Image Select(D) 5-16
Loading data stored on the external media 2-48 Manual Focus(D) 5-17
Loading data stored on the HDD 2-48 Resolution Select(D) 5-17
Loop (3D) 5-54 Smoothing(D) 5-17
Loop Direction 5-54 Sweep Speed(D) 5-18
Loop Mode 2-7 ECG Cycle(VCM) 5-40
Loop playback function 2-6 Element Select 5-29
Method of performing loop playback 2-6 FAM Menu
Method of setting the loop playback range 2-6 Active FAM Off 5-55
Simultaneous loop playback of 2B images 2-7 Contrast(FAM) 5-55
Loop Point 6-31 Cursor Size 5-55
Loop Speed 5-54 FAM Mode 5-55
Gamma(FAM) 5-55
M Magnification(FAM) 5-56
M Modes 1-51 Multi FAM 5-56
Manual Focus(B) 6-36 PSAX 5-56
Manual Focus(D,Flow) 6-36 Sweep Speed(FAM) 5-56
Manual Focus(M) 6-36 FLOW/Power Flow/TDI Flow/TDI Power Flow menu
MEASUREMENT 1-20,1-49 5-19
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
Average(Flow) 5-19 Color Map(B,M) 5-29

B Refresh 5-19 DICOM Printer(S) 5-38
Baseline Shift(Flow) 5-19 ECG Display 5-29
Capture Mode 5-20 ECG SYNC 5-29
Capture Time 5-20 Graphic Color 5-30
Color Map(Flow) 5-20 Graphic Editor 5-30
Color Polarity 5-21 Imaging Information 5-31
DDD 5-21 INVERT 5-31
DISP Priority Level 5-22 Invert Link 5-31
Display Priority 5-22 Menu Location 5-31
Flow Filter 5-22 PC Printer 5-38
Focus(Flow) 5-23 Post Processing 5-32
Frame CORRE 5-23 Post Processing Level 5-34
Frame Rate 5-23 R Wave Beep 5-35
Frame Rate Accelerator 5-24 R-Delay Time 5-35
Image Select(Flow) 5-24 Send to Storage(S) 5-35
Manual Focus(Flow) 5-24 Steering invert 5-36
Noise Reduction(FLOW) 5-25 Steering Link 5-36
Pixel Smoothing(Flow) 5-25 Store on FDD(S) 5-37
Rejection(Flow) 5-25 Store on HDD(S) 5-37
Smoothing(Flow) 5-25 Store on MO(S) 5-36
Wall Motion Reduction 5-26 Thermal Index 5-37
Format (VCM) 5-41 View Gamma 5-38
Format(Quad) 5-47 Zoom Lock 5-38
Frame Rate (VCM) 5-41 Pause Protocol 5-45
Label 5-46 PCG Display 5-32
Load 5-41 PCG Filter 5-32
Load Again 5-42 Pixel Smoothing (B) 5-11
Load Next 5-42 Priority Cycle Select 5-45
Load Previous 5-42 Protocol 5-45
Load(Stress Echo) 5-41 Protocol Select 5-44
Loop Mode (VCM) 5-42 Pulse Display 5-35
M mode menu 5-13 Quad Position 5-42
AGC 5-13 Quad Position Setup 5-43
Echo Erase 5-13 RT 3D Menu 5-49
Focus(M) 5-13 Send to Storage 5-43
FTC 5-13 Shuffle 5-46
Manual Focus(M) 5-14 Skip View 5-46
Relief(M) 5-14 Store (Stress Echo) 5-43
Sweep Speed(M) 5-14 Store on Disk 5-43
Other menu 5-27 Stress Acquire 5-45
ACQUIRE -> SEND 5-39 Stress Echo Control 5-45
ACQUIRE -> Store (HDD) 5-39 Stress Mode 5-43
ACQUIRE -> Store (MO) 5-39 Systolic Loop 5-47
Archive Group1 5-39 Systolic Loop,Time 5-47
Archive Group2 5-39 TDI-D menu 5-15
Archive Group3 5-39 Timer 5-46
Area Lock 5-27 User Protocol 5-44
B/SYNC Mode 5-28 VCM Menu 5-40
Beam Steering 5-27 Zoom (VCM) 5-44
Body Mark Location 5-27 Menu Display Method 6-7
Body Mark Menu 5-28 Menu Display on Print 6-7
Character Size 5-28 Menu setting operations 5-1
Coding Editor 5-28 Method of copying preset No. data to a floppy disk 6-20
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
Method of Displaying Physiological Signals 4-1 Printing an image 2-25

MODE 1-21 Printing data on a DICOM printer 2-25
Moving a word 1-8 Printing on a local printer 2-25
Setting the printing conditions 2-26
N PROBE 1-25
Noise Reduction 6-47,6-50,6-55 Probe List 6-25
Number of Print 6-7 Probe list 6-4
Probe Menu 6-8
6-4,6-25
O Probe Select
Procedure for Changing the Set Contents 6-2
OMNI Plane 6-32 Puncture Guide Line 6-32
OMNI Plane Angle 6-32 PW Sound On 6-30
OMNI Plane Mark 6-32
Operating the various switches
Operation Method
1-3
1-1
R
Operation panel 1-1 RANGE 1-12
Operations using the panel switches on the SSD-4000 R-Delay Time 4-2,6-43
side 3-2 Read Zoom 1-34
Playback 3-2 Reading image data in the VCM 2-38
Recording 3-2 Real Time 3D
Search 3-3 Meaning of terms 1-72
Orientation (3D) 5-53 Setting an uptake range in Real time 3D 1-78
Overlay Graphic 5-52 Real time 3D
Display screen 1-69,1-73
P Transition of real-time 3D image 1-74
Real Time 3D Mode
Panel Beep 6-7
Applied functional operation procedure 1-84
Patient Information 1-37
Pausing acquiring 2-44
Displaying 3D image with Real time 3D-mode 1-80
Physiological Signals 4-1
Switches to be used 1-75
Ping 6-18
Switches to be used and menu 1-75
Ping Pong 6-36
Switching the display format of Real time 3D mode 1-81
Pixel Smoothing(Flow) 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
Real time 3D mode 1-68
Position Shift 6-30
REC 1-26,3-1
Post Processing 6-37
Recording and playing back images on a VCR 3-1
Power Flow 5-19,6-49,6-50
Recording Images 3-1
Recording to a printer 3-1
Power Flow Display 6-50,6-58
RefA 5-50
Power Flow display 1-61
RefB 5-50
Basic operation 1-61
RefC 5-50
Preparations for a stress echo examination 2-49
Registering keywords and words 1-7
Preparing Continuous Acquire 2-41
Reject 5-32
PRESET 1-24
Rejection(Flow) 6-47,6-55
Preset 6-1
Remote C-ECHO 6-17
PRESET function 6-1
Remote Ping 6-17
Preset Control 6-19
Rendering Mode 5-51
Preset Name 6-25
REPORT 1-26
Preset No. 6-20,6-21,6-22,6-25
Request function 1-22
Preset Set-up Menu 6-25
Reset (3D) 5-50
PRF Limit 6-35
Restarting acquiring 2-44
PRINT 1-24
Resume 6-6
Print Select 6-10
REVIEW 1-26
Printer Select(B/W) 6-7
Review Function 2-14
Printer Select(Color) 6-7
Image Browser 2-14
Printing a VCR Image 3-4
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
Basic operation 2-14 Steering invert 1-30

Description of each button on the Image Browser Steering Link 6-30
screen 2-15 Step Angle 5-54
Reading an image from an CD-R Buffer, MO disk or STORE 1-30
CD-R disk 2-17 Store on CD-R Buffer(JPG) 5-37
Reading an image from the hard disk in the equipment Store on CD-R Buffer(M) 5-37
2-16 Store on CD-R BUFFER(S) 2-12
Rotary Plane Angle 6-32 Store on CD-R Buffer(S) 5-36
Rotary Plane Mark 6-32 Store on Disk 6-17
ROTAT 1-30 Store on FD(JPG) 2-12
Rotation Angle 5-54 Store on HDD(S) 2-12
Rotation Axis 5-54 Store on MO(JPG) 2-12,5-36
RT3D 6-65 Store on MO(S) 2-11
R-Wave Beep 6-43 Store/Send 2-8
R-Wave Blink 6-43 Basic Operation Procedure 2-11
Saving images with Menu 2-13
S Saving images with STORE switch 2-11
SAMPLE VOLUME 1-27,6-45,6-53 Storing an image 2-20
Saving a loop images to a Hard disk 2-37 CD-R Disk 2-21,2-24
Saving a volume data to a file 1-83 MO or FD disk 2-23
Scan Angle (3D) 5-49 Network sending 2-22
SCAN AREA 1-27 Storing an image in the BMP, TIFF or JPEG format 2-23
Scan Area(B(Flow)) 6-29 Storing an image in the DICOM format 2-20
Scan Area(B(Flow)/D) 6-29 Storing image data 2-47
Scan Area(B) 6-28 Storing loop images to an MO disk 2-34
Schema display 2-72 Stress Echo 6-63
Scoring 2-73,5-48 Load 2-76
Scoring Report 2-74,5-48 Operating Examples for taking in Images 2-59
scroll function 2-2 Operating examples of Shuffle 2-67
SEARCH 1-29,1-36 Operating examples of Store 2-75
Search box 2-32 Other Functions 2-66
Search function 1-43 Preparations before Taking in Images 2-59
search function 2-2 When a Protocol Type is Template Acquisition 2-59
Searching or scrolling B, M or D mode image 2-4 When Protocol Type is a Continuous Acquisition 2-63
Searching or scrolling B/M or B/D mode images 2-4 Stress Echo Examination 2-49,2-57
SELECT 1-28 Stress Echo(Option
Send to Storage 2-13,6-17 EU-9083 is necessary) 6-60
Sending loop images to a network 2-35 Study for Measurement 6-25
Series/Image Information 1-41 Study Information 1-39
Setting a protocol 2-49 Sweep Method 6-30
Setting Procedure 5-2 SWEEP SPEED 1-31
Moving a sub-menu 5-3 Sweep Speed(D) 6-30
Sub-menus 5-3 Sweep Speed(M) 6-30
Setting the start and end frames 2-33 Switch applied 2-41
Slope 5-32 Switches used for menu setting operations 5-1
Smoothing 2-26 Syntax 6-17
Smoothing (3D) 5-52
Smoothing(B) 6-35 T
Spectrum Invert 6-45,6-53 T.B. Speed 6-6
Spectrum Size 6-28 T.B.Priority(FRZ Off) 6-31
Starting a stress echo examination 2-52 T.B.Priority(FRZ On) 6-31
STC 1-29 TDI Flow 5-19,5-22
STEER 1-30 TDI POWER FLOW MENU 5-19
STEER/ROTAT 1-30
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
Thermal Index 6-31 When reading the patient information from the external
Time 6-6 medium into the system 1-47
Timer Freeze 6-6 When rearranging Preset No. data 6-22
Timer Freeze,Time 6-6 When storing the patient information from the system into
Tissue Doppler 6-52 the external medium 1-47
Setting IP Select 6-52 Work List C-ECHO 6-17
Tissue Doppler Imaging display 1-61 Work List Ping 6-17
TDI display 1-61 Z
Tissue Flow 6-54 ZOOM 1-33
Setting IP Select 6-54 Zoom Lock 6-45,6-53
Tissue Power Flow 6-57 Zoom Method 6-30
Translation 5-51
Triplex Mode 6-28
Triplex Mode Type 6-28
Triplex VEL Range 6-31
Triplex,Frame Rate(B) 6-31
TV SYNC 5-44,6-36
U
Unit 6-6
V
VCM(Option
EU-9083 is necessary) 6-11
EU-9111 is necessary) 6-13
VEL RANGE 1-32
Velocity Range(Flow) 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
Velocity Range(PW) 6-45,6-53
Video IN 6-7
Video OUT, Color Burst 6-7
View Gamma 6-35
W
Wall Motion Reduction 6-47,6-50,6-55,6-58
When copying Body Mark Library from a floppy disk 6-23
When copying Color Map from a floppy disk 6-24
When copying Common Preset data from a floppy disk
6-23
When copying Common Preset data to a floppy disk 6-23
When copying data in Annotation Dictionary from a floppy
disk 6-22
When copying data in Annotation Dictionary to a floppy
disk 6-22
When copying Preset No. data from a floppy disk 6-21
When copying preset No. data inside the equipment 6-21
When deleting the patient information
1-48
When operating it by the main part side of VCR 3-1
Playback 3-2
Recording 3-1
MN1-1174 Rev.9
INDEX(How to Use)
MN1-1174 Rev.9
MN1-1174 Rev.9
MANUFACTURER ALOKA CO.,LTD.
Aloka Co., Ltd.

22-1, Mure 6-chome, Mitaka-Shi, Tokyo, 181-8622 Japan Tel : +81-422-45-6049
URL:http:// www.aloka.com
Overseas Offices:
ALOKA GmbH: Authorized EU-representative
Mollsfeld 5, 40670 Meerbusch, Germany
Aloka Beijing Office

1507 Canway Building 66 Nan Li Shi Road Baijing, China 100045
Aloka Co., Ltd. Singapore Office

1, Maritime Square, #10-32/32A, HarbourFront Centre, Singapore, 099253
Distributor
MN1-1174 Rev.9 '06.02.14

Aloka SSD 4000 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aloka SSD 4000 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MN1-1174 Rev.

ALOKA CO., LTD.

Safety alert symbols

1-3-37. STC ............................................................................................................................................. 1-29

2. Cine Memory and Store Image

5-5. D mode/TDI-D menu ................................................................................................................................. 5-15

5-7-8. Color Map (B,M) ........................................................................................................................ 5-29

5-9-8. 3D ............................................................................................................................................... 5-50

POWER DISK CAPS LOCK FUNCTION

NEW FRAME ACOUST SWEEP I.P. ELEMENT

Home PgDn End

M/D GAIN STEER POWER

Fig. Operation panel

Rotary encoder 1 Used to set the measurement and zoom functions.

Rotary encoder 2 Used to set the menu settings.

This section consists of 86 pages.

1-2. Graphic Display

ALOKA ALOKA :No ID : Y '00/02/28

Fig. B mode image

(1) Gray scale bar

(2) Scale mark

(3) Active mark

(4) Focus mark

1-3. Operating the various switches

1-3-1. ACOUST POWER

(1) Press the ACOUST POWER switch.

(3) Press the ACOUST POWER switch to terminate this function.

(1) Press the ANGLE switch.

(2) Perform angle correction with rotary encoder3.

(3) Press the ANGLE switch.

(4) Press the ANGLE switch again to terminate the function.

1-3-4. BODY MARK

(1) Press the BODYMARK switch.

(2) Set the position of the probe mark.

(3) Press the BODYMARK switch.

b. Rotate the fetus mark with the rotary encoder 1.

c. Press the MARK REF switch.

(Changing the body mark)

a. Press the MENU switch.

d. Press the MENU switch.

(1) Press the Comment key on the keyboard.

(5) Press the SET switch or the return key.

(6) Press the Comment key.

1) Registering keywords and words

(1) Press the Comment key.

(3) Point to the to DIC 1, and press the SET switch.

(4) Point to Key, and press the SET switch.

(5) Enter a keyword. (Max 8 characters)

(6) Press the SET switch or the Return key.

(8) Press the SET switch or the Return key.

(2) Press the MARK REF switch.

(3) Move the word using the trackball.

(4) Press the MARK REF switch.

(2) Press the Del key on the keyboard.

: Decreases the contrast.

(3) Press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch to terminate this function.

<B.L.S. (BASE LINE SHIFT)>

(2) Adjust the position of the baseline with rotary encoder 1.

(4) Once again, press the CURSOR/B.L.S switch.

1-3-12. DOP FILTER

: Decreases the degree of filter cut.

1-3-13. ELEMENT SELECT

(1) Press the ELEMENT SELECT switch.

B/M mode B/M mode

B/D mode B/D mode